Você está na página 1de 367

Welcome To MathType 6.

Thank you for evaluating and purchasing MathType. Evaluating MathType If you have installed MathType without a product key, you can evaluate MathType's full feature set for 30 days. After the 30 days are up, MathType will go into Lite Mode. If you decide not to purchase MathType, you can continue to use MathType in Lite Mode and edit MathType equations. If you had been using our Equation Editor product before you installed MathType, you can continue to use it by uninstalling MathType. However, Equation Editor cannot edit equations created in MathType. See Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType and Lite Mode for more details and instructions on how to purchase a product key to unlock MathType. Enabling Macros After installing MathType, Word will likely warn you that macros have been disabled and offer you some options for enabling them. We recommend that you choose Trust all documents from this publisher (Office 2007) or Always trust macros from this publisher (Office 2000, 2002, and 2003) for macros whose publisher is Design Science, Inc. See Enabling Macros in Microsoft Word if you need additional help on this issue. Getting Started If you are new to MathType, we highly encourage you to take several minutes to run through our Basic Tutorials. Creating equations with MathType is not difficult but there are a few concepts that you will need that will make it even easier. Our Technical Support Manager says, "Whenever I have recommended to users to read through the tutorials, their feedback was that they had found it to have been invaluable." Those already familiar with MathType will want to review the New Features in this release. See Also: New Features Basic Tutorials Enabling Macros in Microsoft Word Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType and Lite Mode

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Getting Started
In This Chapter Enabling Macros in Microsoft Word Basic Tutorials More Tutorials

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Enabling Macros in Microsoft Word


When you open Microsoft Word for the first time after installing MathType, you may have to enable the MathType macros. If macros are not enabled you will see a security warning that tells you that macros have been disabled and give you options for enabling them. This warning is presented differently in different versions of Word. In Word 2007: The security warning in Word 2007 appears below the ribbon.

To enable MathType macros: 1. Click the Options... button. 2. Ensure the macro file listed has been signed by Design Science, Inc. 3. Select Trust all documents from this publisher. 4. Click OK. In Word 2000,2002,2003: These versions of Word have slightly different, but very similar dialogs that appear when you open Word. The dialog shown below is taken from 2003.

These steps for enabling macros should be the same for 2000, 2002, and 2003 1. Ensure the macro file listed has been signed by Design Science, Inc. 2. Select Always trust macros from this publisher. 3. Click Enable Macros.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Basic Tutorials
In This Chapter Before You Start Fractions and Square Roots Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts Editing Old Equations What To Do Next

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Before You Start


This chapter contains several tutorial examples of using MathType. We provide step-by-step instructions for each example, so you should find it easy to work through them. You can find symbols and templates either in the palettes at the very top of the MathType window, or in the bars lower down. You have to pull down the palettes to find the items you need, but you can just click on the ones in the bars. You can change the contents of these bars at any time. See Using MathType's Toolbar. Fonts and the A ppearance of Your Equations The tutorials will often tell you that "your equation should now look like this." In fact, the appearance of your equation will be determined by the fonts you are using, so you shouldn't take this statement too literally. MathType's default fonts are Times New Roman, Symbol and MT Extra. These fonts will probably be acceptable, at least for the purposes of working through the tutorial, and we recommend that you stick with them until you've gained some experience working with MathType. For the time being, please do change fonts by choosing Other on the Style menu - as you'll see in Fonts and Styles, there's a much better way of doing this in MathType. Some Final A dvice In the first few tutorial examples, we're going to assume that you're using MathType along with Microsoft Word to create a document. If you want to work through the tutorials using some other word processing application, it should be easy to adapt the instructions that follow. Also, instructions for using MathType with other applications are available in Using MathType with Applications and Websites.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Fractions and Square Roots


In our first tutorial, we will create the equation

This is a very simple equation, but you'll learn about fractions and square root templates, and we'll explore the properties of the insertion point, and illustrate MathType's function recognition and automatic spacing capabilities. To create the equation, just follow the steps listed below. Remember that the characters you have to type into the equation are shown in bold type . Word Toolbar You can insert a display equation using the button on Word's MathType toolbar. You can see what each toolbar button does by holding the mouse pointer over the button for a couple of seconds. A tooltip will appear containing the name of the button's command. 1. Open a new Word document, and type a few lines of text, just to make the situation a bit more realistic. 2. Now we're ready to insert a MathType equation. If you installed MathType correctly, there should be a MathType menu towards the right-hand end of the Word menu bar, or a MathType tab in the ribbon interface, if using Office 2007. From the MathType menu or tab choose Insert Display Equation. This will open a MathType window, ready for you to start creating the equation. If for some reason neither the MathType menu nor the MathType tab is available in Word, use Word's Insert Object command (choose Object on the Insert menu), and choose MathType 6.0 Equation from the list of object types displayed. See Inserting Equations to learn about other ways to insert an equation, either in Word or other applications. 3. In the MathType window, type y= . You don't have to type a space between the y and the =, because MathType takes care of the spacing automatically. To help you break the habit of typing spaces, the spacebar is disabled most of the time in MathType, so pressing it will have no effect (other than producing an annoying beep!). Define Spacing Dialog discusses where and how you should enter spaces in MathType, but you won't have to do this very often. Also, notice that the has been made italic, but the = sign has not. Mathematical variables are almost always printed in italics, so this is the default in MathType. You can change this by redefining the Variable style using the Define command on MathType's Style menu. 4. Now we need to enter a square root sign. To do this, click on the this: icon in the Small Bar. The template's home is in the

palette, but we've also copied it into the Small Bar to make it easier for you to find. Your equation should now look like

The characters in the equation might be larger than you expect, but this is just a result of the viewing scale you're using. Choose Zoom from the View menu to change the viewing scale to anything between 25% and 800%. The blinking insertion point should be in the slot under the square root sign, indicating that whatever you enter next will appear there. 5. Next, we enter a fraction template. To do this, click on the palette. Notice there are two fractions shown on the top row. The first one is the full-size fraction, which would be too big for this situation. Click on the second one. This template produces reduced-size fractions, sometimes known as "case" fractions in the typesetting world. Case fractions are generally used to save space when the numerator and denominator of the fraction are just plain numbers. Be careful not to choose the larger template - this would create a full-size fraction, which would be too big for this situation. Notice how MathType automatically expands the size of the square root sign to accommodate the fraction. Your equation should now look like this:

The insertion point should be in the numerator (upper) slot of the fraction template. Fraction Template As you hold the mouse pointer over the palette items their name is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the MathType window. This will help you make sure you pick the correct template. 6. To enter the numerator of the fraction, just type 3. 7. Now we need to move the insertion point down into the denominator slot of the fraction. You can do this by pressing the Tab key or by clicking inside the denominator slot in your equation. 8. Enter the denominator by typing 16.

9. Next we need to add the sin outside of the square root sign, and to do this we have to get the insertion point into the correct position in the hierarchy of slots that make up the equation. If you repeatedly press the Tab key, you can make the insertion point cycle through all the slots in the formula. If you hold down the Shift key while you do this, the insertion point will cycle through the slots in the reverse direction. Try this out to see how it works. Three of the positions that the insertion point will assume during the course of this cycling are shown below. Use a viewing scale of 400% or 800%, so that you can see what's happening a little better:

If you use the Show Nesting command on the View menu, you can get an even better picture of the hierarchical arrangement of slots in your equation:

We have to decide which of these insertion point positions is the right one for adding the sin . The position on the left is clearly wrong - we don't want the sin to go in the denominator of the fraction. In the position shown in the center, the insertion point is in the main slot under the square root sign, so if we type in sin the result will be the following formula:

This is not what we want either. The insertion point position shown on the far right is the correct one; the insertion point is outside the square root, which is where we want the sin to go. Functions You can customize the list of functions that MathType automatically recognizes. Including Text in an Equation contains an example. 10. Keep pressing the Tab key until the insertion point arrives in the correct position, and then type in the letters sinx . Type slowly, so that you can watch what happens. When you initially type them, the s and the i will be italic, because MathType assumes that they are variables. However, as soon as you type the n, MathType recognizes that sin is an abbreviation for the sine function. Following standard typesetting rules, MathType uses plain Roman (non-italic) format for the sin, and inserts a thin space (one sixth of an em) between the sin and the x. 11. Type -c. Remember you don't have to type the spaces. You insert the minus sign by pressing the (minus/hyphen) key on your keyboard. In a word processor, pressing this key inserts a hyphen, which is typically shorter than a minus sign. However, since hyphens are very uncommon in mathematics, MathType replaces them by minus signs for you (when the Math style is in effect). Your equation should now look like this:

12. Next we need to attach the superscript (or exponent) to the . To do this, click on the a superscript slot next to the c, as shown below:

icon in the Small Bar. This will create

Keyboard Shortcuts You can also create a superscript slot by typing Ctrl+H. Ctrl+L inserts a subscript slot. 13. Type 2, and then press Tab to move the insertion point out of the superscript slot, into the position shown below:

14. Click on the in the Small Bar. MathType knows that the as usual, you don't have to type them.

symbol is supposed to have spaces around it in this situation, so,

Greek Characters You can enter a Greek character using Ctrl+G and its equivalent, e.g. m for , P for

15. Choose the from the palette - it's the second one from the right in the row of Symbol Palettes. Alternatively, as the Greek letter corresponds to the letter m, you can press Ctrl+G, followed by m . Your equation should look like this:

16. Finish the formula by typing tanx . Again, notice that MathType uses plain (instead of italic) type for the tan function and puts

thin spaces on either side of it. Your finished equation should look like this:

Keyboard Shortcut The quickest way to close the MathType window is by pressing Ctrl+F4. 17. Close the MathType window, either by clicking on its close box or by choosing the Close and return to <document> command on the File menu, and choose Yes in response to the dialog that asks if you want to save changes. This will insert your equation into the Word document in "displayed" form (on a line by itself), like this

18. In other situations, you might want to embed an equation within a line of text, for example rather than , displaying it on a line by itself. To do this, choose Insert Inline Equation from Word's MathType menu, MathType toolbar or MathType tab.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts


In this tutorial we'll create the formula that is often used to calculate a statistical quantity known as variance. The formula is:

This formula illustrates the use of subscripts, superscripts, and summation templates. Integral and product templates behave much the same as summation templates, so what you learn in this tutorial will be useful in a variety of other situations. The steps required to create the formula are as follows: 1. Open a new Word document, and type a few lines of text. 2. Choose Insert Display Equation from Word's MathType menu, MathType toolbar or the MathType tab in Office 2007's ribbon interface. This will open a MathType window, ready for you to start creating the equation. 3. Enter a One way to do this is to choose it from the palette. Alternatively, you could use its keyboard shortcut. The keyboard shortcuts for toolbar items are displayed in the status bar as you move the mouse over them. In this case you can press Ctrl+G followed by s. Zoom Levels A quick way to change zoom level is to right-click in the Zoom panel on the status bar. Or, you can type: Ctrl+1 for 100%, Ctrl+2 for 200%, Ctrl+4 for 400%, or Ctrl+8 for 800%. 4. Next, create a slot for the superscript on the by clicking on the icon in the Small Bar. Subscripts and superscripts are rather small. In order to better see what's happening, make sure you've chosen at least 200% viewing scale in the Zoom submenu of the View menu. 5. The insertion point will be located in the newly created superscript slot. Type the superscript, 2. 6. Now let's move the insertion point to the location shown below:

Either press the Tab key, or click somewhere out to the right of the equation, as shown in the picture. Be careful not to place the pointer too close to the superscript slot, or else the insertion point may jump into it when you click. 7. Type in the = sign. Remember not to type any spaces. 8. Construct the fraction by using the full-size careful - it's not the same template as the template, which is available in the Small Bar and in the palette. Be

fraction template that we used in Fractions and Square Roots.

Inserting Fractions You can also insert the fraction template by pressing Ctrl+F. 9. The insertion point will be located in the newly created numerator slot; type the number 1 into this slot. 10. Move the insertion point down into the denominator slot either by clicking in it or by pressing the Tab key. Then type in the denominator, N, and press the Tab key again to move the insertion point out of the denominator slot. Your equation should now look like this:

11. Click on the

icon to enter a summation template. Your equation should now look like this:

12. Next we need to insert a pair of parentheses. You can do this either by clicking on the Ctrl+9 keyboard shortcut.

icon in the palette, or by using the

13. Type the letter X into the summand slot (the large slot on the right). 14. Attach a subscript to the X, using the 15. Type -x . 16. Place a bar over the x by clicking on the icon in the palette. In MathType, embellishments of this type are always added to the character to the left of the insertion point. You can even add several embellishments to the same character. For more details, see Embellishments. 17. Press tab to move the insertion point outside the parentheses, making sure to stay within the summand. In fact, as we saw in Fractions and Square Roots, if you keep pressing the Tab key, the insertion point will cycle through all the slots in the equation and will eventually reach the position shown, regardless of where it started out. If you want to move the insertion point by clicking, click somewhere near the point indicated by the arrow in the picture above. You might want to use Show Nesting on the View menu to make this easier. Your equation should now look like this: template. Type an i into the subscript slot.

18. Enter the superscript 2 by using the

template. Type a 2 into the superscript slot.

19. Press Tab to move the insertion point into the lower limit slot of the summation template, and type i=1. As usual, do not type any spaces. MathType will automatically reduce the size of the text, and will center it below the summation sign. In this case, MathType will not insert any spaces around the = sign, since it is in the limit of a summation. Again, this is a standard typesetting convention that you can override if you want to. 20. Press Tab to move to the upper limit slot of the summation template, and type in the upper limit, N. The equation is now complete (well, maybe it is - see the next step below). 21. We hope you're happy with the way MathType formats your equation, but, if you're not, we've provided a way for you to make some fine adjustments of your own. You can select any item or group of items, in the usual way, and nudge them either horizontally or vertically in steps of one pixel (screen dot). If you view your equation at 800% scale you can make adjustments as small as an eighth of a point. To nudge items, use the following keystrokes: Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl Ctrl + + + + nudges the selected items to the left by one pixel nudges the selected items upward by one pixel nudges the selected items to the right by one pixel nudges the selected items downward by one pixel

Selecting an Embellishment You can select an embellishment by holding down the Ctrl key and then clicking on the embellishment. You might want to try moving a subscript or a superscript, moving the limits of the summation, or even moving the bar embellishment. Keep in mind, however, that nudging is really intended for making small adjustments that cannot be achieved otherwise. The preferred method for adjusting spacing is using the Define Spacing Dialog. This approach has the advantage that the spacing rules you define affect all equations. 22. Close the MathType window, which will insert the equation into your Word document. Save the document, because we're going to use it in the next tutorial.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Editing Old Equations


This tutorial teaches you some special editing techniques that are useful when you're modifying an existing equation. You will often need to correct a mistake in an old equation, or make a new one that is a slight variation of one that you have made in the past. Instead of starting from scratch, you can bring a copy of the old equation back into MathType and modify it as needed. In this way, all your old documents serve as sources of material for new documents. You can store commonly used equations (or fragments of equations) in word processing documents or as expressions within MathType itself. Let's suppose that the equation we created in Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts is the wrong one, and we want to use the following related formula in our document instead:

The steps required are as follows: 1. Open the Word document containing the equation you created in Sums, Subscripts & Superscripts above. We want to bring this equation back into MathType for editing.The simplest way to do this is to double-click on it. This will open the equation for editing, in a new MathType window. 2. Select the term on the left-hand side of the equation by dragging the arrow pointer across it while holding down the left mouse button. The selected items will be highlighted by black-white reversal, in the usual Windows manner. It should look like this:

3. Delete the selected items by using the Clear command on the Edit menu, or by pressing the Backspace key or the Delete key. 4. The insertion point is in the right place, immediately to the left of the = sign, so you can now enter the new left-hand side. Type in the letter s and attach the N-1 subscript to it by using the template, in the usual way.

template around the existing 5. Next, we're going to enclose the right-hand side in a square root sign. We're going to "wrap" a terms - previously we have always inserted templates first, and then filled in their slots afterwards. Select the entire right-hand side of the equation, watching the highlighting carefully to see that your selection is correct. It should look like this:

Now click on the template will be inserted into your equation and automatically wrapped around icon in the Small Bar. The the selected items. When you insert a template, MathType always wraps it around any selected items. 6. You might be wondering how you would do the reverse of the operation we performed in step 5. Suppose you had an expression enclosed in a square root sign (or some other template) and you wanted to remove the square root sign but keep the expression. To do this, you first select the expression under the square root sign and choose Cut to transfer it to the Clipboard. Next, select the (now empty) square root sign, and press Backspace or Delete to remove it. Finally, choose Paste to bring the expression back from the Clipboard. 7. Finally, we have to change the N in the denominator of the fraction to N 1. Position the insertion point in the denominator slot, to the right of the N, by clicking near the point indicated by the arrow pointer in the picture below:

Then, simply type -1 to change the denominator. Color You can customize the Color menu by choosing Edit Color Menu in the MathType menu under Format Color. 8. Let's now suppose we want to change the color of the term from black to red. Select the term using the mouse, and then choose the Color command on the Format menu. A submenu appears containing a list of colors. Choose Red and release the mouse. The selected term will become red (you will have to click outside the equation to de-select the term in order to see the new color).

9. We're finished editing the equation, so close the MathType window. If a dialog appears asking if you want to save your changes, click Yes. Once the MathType window has closed, your word processor will become active and you'll see that your document now contains the modified equation, which should look like this:

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

What To Do Next
By completing these tutorials, you've gone through the basics of using MathType and can start using equations in your documents. However, there's still a lot more you can do in MathType. See More Tutorials.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

More Tutorials
In This Chapter Fonts and Styles Including Text in an Equation Using MathType's Toolbar Spacing and Alignment A Simple Matrix Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word Advanced Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2007 Document Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2000, 2002 or 2003 Document Formatting with Tabs Inserting Unusual Symbols Creating Webpages with Microsoft Word Creating Webpages with GIF Files Customizing the Keyboard Working with TeX, LaTeX & MathML Exporting Equations in Microsoft Word Simplifying Rational Expressions by Dividing Common Factors What To Do Next

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Fonts and Styles


This tutorial provides an introduction to MathType's system of styles. We will demonstrate how to change the fonts in your equations by changing style definitions. Using styles will allow you to achieve the formatting you want quickly and easily, and enable you to create equations with a consistent appearance. See Style menu for more information about styles, fonts and sizes. In the following steps, we will create the equation

and experiment with changing the look of the equation by using different style definitions. 1. Check that the Status Bar's Style panel displays "Math". If it doesn't, choose Math from the Style menu. If the Math style is not chosen, MathType's automatic style assignment will not be in effect, and the rest of this tutorial will not make much sense. 2. Create the equation, using the template for the fraction and inserting the palette, or by using the Ctrl+G shortcut. The " " operator is located on the and by choosing them from the lowercase Greek

palette. The equation should now look like this:

3. From the Style menu, choose Define. If necessary, click on the Simple button to display the dialog shown below.

The TeX Look We've included a MathType preference file called TeXLook.eqp that contains font and spacing settings that make MathType equations look like TeX. It's in the Preferences folder inside your MathType folder. See Preferences menu for more details on using preference files. Change the "Primary font" to Euclid, change the "Greek and math fonts" to Euclid Symbol and Euclid Extra, as shown in the dialog above, and then click Apply. On screen, your equation will now look like this:

The Euclid fonts supplied with MathType are based on the Computer Modern fonts typically used with TeX so they give your documents a TeX-like appearance that you might prefer for some types of work. Another benefit of the Euclid fonts is that their regular and Greek characters have a consistent size, whereas Times and Symbol are somewhat mismatched. Of course, if you use the Euclid fonts in your equations, you will probably want to use Euclid as the primary body font in your word processing document, too. 4. Open the Define Styles dialog, and click on "Factory settings" to return to using the Times New Roman and Symbol fonts. 5. Click on the Advanced button to display a more extensive form of the Define Styles dialog. This is shown below:

TIP The changes you make in this dialog apply to the current equation. Check "Use for new equations" to use the settings for new equations as well. The names of the eleven styles are listed in the dialog box, together with the font and character style assigned to each. The equation you have just created uses the Function, Variable, L.C. Greek, Number, and Symbol styles. The letters "exp" are recognized as the abbreviation for the exponential function, and are assigned the Function style; , , and are treated as variables and assigned the Variable style; and being lowercase Greek letters, are assigned the L.C. (lowercase) Greek style, and the numbers in the fraction use the Number style. The symbols =, , (, ), and + use the Symbol style. (The angle brackets and fraction bar are internal to MathType and do not use a style.) These styles are applied automatically as you create the equation, because you are using the Math style mode. This automatic style assignment is the advantage you gain by using the Math style mode when creating equations. More About Styles The subject of MathType's styles is covered in more detail in Style menu. We're going to change some of the styles so you understand how they affect an equation's appearance. Normally you wouldn't work this way, you'd change fonts using the Simple version of this dialog. 6. Choose a new font for the Function style. The style is probably defined as Times or Times New Roman. Press on the arrow next to the font name in the Function row and choose a different font. You will want to choose a font that looks noticeably different from Times, so that the effect of the change will be obvious. A good choice would be a sans serif font such as Arial. 7. Choose the OK button. Your equation will be redisplayed using the new Function style definition. Your equation should now look like this:

The function abbreviation, exp, is displayed using the new font. Of course, you probably wouldn't want your equation to look like this - we're simply demonstrating the effect of changing the Function style definition. The Variable style definition is used for all ordinary alphabetic characters except for the ones in function abbreviations. In the current equation, this includes , , and . Very often, according to convention, the only difference you want between the Variable and Function styles is for the Variable style to be defined as italic. Let's redefine the Variable style so that it's consistent with the new Function style definition. Choosing Fonts A fast way to select a font is to click in the list and then type the first letter of the name. You can also use the scroll bar in the list to move around quickly. 8. Again, choose Define from the Style menu. In the Define Styles dialog box, press on the arrow next to font name in the Variable row, and choose the same font assigned to the Function style. Check that the italic character style is checked for Variable, but not for Function. Let's also change the Number style so that it uses the same font as Function and Variable. You will find that this makes the equation look better. Finally, turn off the italic character style for the L.C. Greek style by removing the check in the Character Style column. Lowercase Greek letters are usually italicized, but let's experiment with this. Note that for the two Greek styles and the Symbol style you can only assign fonts with the same encoding (arrangement of characters) as the Symbol font. This typically

restricts your choice to the Symbol font, the Euclid Symbol font, or some other similar font. 9. Choose the OK button. Your equation will be redisplayed using the new style definitions. If you are using the fonts we've recommended, the equation should now look like this:

The "variables" , , and , and the numbers in the fraction now use the new font definitions, and the lower-case Greek letters and are no longer italicized. You may want to use style definitions such as these for equations in a document in which the text is written in Arial or Tahoma. To reset the style definitions, open the Define Styles dialog and click "Factory settings". TIP You can also right-click in the Style panel of the Status Bar to make the Style menu appear. While working through this tutorial, you have probably noticed that each of the styles is also listed as a command on the Style menu. This allows you to explicitly assign a particular style to selected or subsequently-typed characters. The Other command on the Style menu can be used to assign any font available on your computer to selected or subsequently-typed characters. Please see Style menu for further details.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Including Text in an Equation


In our next tutorial, we show you how to enter words and phrases in an equation, and also how to handle function name abbreviations that MathType does not recognize. We are going to create the following equation:

1. First, open a new MathType window using one of the methods you've already learned. Then type Prob(A|B). The result will be

Controlling Italics To assign regular (non-italic) style to function names, use Function on the Style menu, rather than just removing the italics. Using its built-in table of function names, MathType has recognized Pr as an abbreviation for "probability" and set it in the Function style, while o and b are regarded as variables. In this tutorial, we want to use Prob, rather than just Pr, as our abbreviation for "probability". You might think that you can fix the problem by just making the o and b non-italic, but we don't recommend this. If you simply remove the italicization, MathType will still regard o and b as variables, which is not what we intend. The right approach is to select Prob and choose Function from the Style menu. This will remove the italics, but it also tells MathType that Prob is the name of a function, which will affect spacing and translation into languages such as LaTeX and MathML. Copying and Dragging To re-use part of an existing equation, select the part and then use Copy and Paste, or drag and drop. Hold down the Control key when dragging to copy the selection. 2. Create the fraction in the middle term of the equation. You can copy and paste Prob( | ), and modify it for re-use in the numerator and denominator. You can find the set intersection symbol, on the palette. Your equation should now look like

3. Construct the fraction on the right-hand side of the equation by using the positioned in the numerator, ready to type the text. Typing Text Before typing normal words and phrases, choose Text from the Style menu.

template again. The insertion point will be

4. If you just start typing characters into the numerator slot, MathType will assume that they are variables, so they will be italicized, and any spaces you type will be ignored. To type ordinary words and phrases, you should first choose Text from the Style menu. Then type Probability that both A and B occur. The numerator of our fraction will look like this:

This is what we want, except that the word "both" should be bold and the A and B should be italic. 5. Select the word "both", and choose Other from the Style menu. The Other Style dialog will appear, which lets you directly change the font and style (bold & italic) of selected characters. Click on Bold, and then choose OK. 6. Next we want to make the variables A and B italic. We could do this directly by using Other from the Style menu again, but this would not really convey the correct meaning. A better approach is to select the variable A and choose Math from the Style menu, and then repeat for the variable B. This makes the A and B italic, but also tells MathType to treat them as mathematical variables. 7. Enter the denominator of the fraction using the same technique we used for the numerator. This completes the equation, but we can use it to illustrate a few more of MathType's capabilities. New Function Names You can customize the list of functions that MathType automatically recognizes. If you use the abbreviation "Prob" for probability on a regular basis, you'll get tired of manually changing it to Function style all the time, and you'll want MathType to do this for you automatically. From the Preferences menu, choose Functions Recognized. Type Prob as the name of a new function, and click on the Add button. Also, if you don't want MathType to recognize Pr as an abbreviation for "probability", you can select Pr in the list of recognized functions and click on the Remove button. Now try recreating this same equation, to see how much easier it is.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using MathType's Toolbar


In the previous tutorials we saw two formulas that were very similar, in the sense that they had many terms in common. This is typical of many branches of mathematics. For example, consider these formulas from elementary statistics:

Many statistical formulae use the symbols and , and they often involve various combinations of terms like When dealing with repetitive formulae like these you can save yourself a great deal of time by customizing MathType. To save time creating statistical formulae, we're going to place in the Small Bar. We'll also make expressions for and , and place them in the tabbed bars. Then we'll use them to create the second of the equations shown above. The steps are as follows: Toolbar Icon Sizes Using the Workspace Preferences command on the Preferences menu you can alter the size of the toolbar icons. 1. Before we start, make sure that MathType's toolbar is visible and that the Small Bar and the Small and Large Tabbed Bars are visible. Use the commands in the View menu to make them visible if necessary. 2. Click on the symbol palette, and then release the mouse button. The palette will appear.

3. Now hold down the Alt key, press on the and, keeping the left mouse button down, drag it over the Small Bar. You'll see the mouse pointer change shape as it passes over different areas of the toolbar. When the pointer looks like this , the dragged item cannot be dropped at this location and releasing the mouse button will have no effect. When the pointer looks like this it is over a valid target area and releasing the mouse button will insert the object at this location. Release the mouse button over the Small Bar, as shown below. A dding New Symbols You can add any symbol from any font on your computer to the toolbar. Enter it into the equation area, select it, and drag it to the toolbar. Use the Insert Symbol dialog (on the Edit menu - see Inserting Unusual Symbols for details) to locate the symbol, hold down the Alt key and drag the symbol to the toolbar. As a result, MathType has access to a virtually limitless supply of symbols.

The symbol will be added to the end of the bar. Now, to insert this symbol into an equation you only need click on it in the Small Bar instead of hunting for it in the palettes. The Small Bar is a good location for frequently used symbols as it is always available and can contain many items. 4. Next, we're going to add a expression to the Large Tabbed Bar. The tabbed bars are similar to the Small Bar in how they operate, however they're divided into categories, which allows for a much larger number of items. Click on the Statistics tab to display MathType's default items for statistical equations. There should be room for one more item in the Large Tabbed Bar (the bar has room for 8 items). If there isn't, select another tab that does have room. 5. Delete the current contents of the MathType window, and create the expression template (not the template) to do this. in the usual way. You'll need to use the

Editing Toolbar Expressions You can edit a toolbar expression by double-clicking. A new MathType window will open containing the expression. Make your changes, close the window and the toolbar will be updated. 6. To add this expression to the toolbar, select it and drag it to the Large Tabbed Bar. When you release the mouse you'll see the expression appear in the bar. 7. Create an expression for , in exactly the same way. Place this expression in the Small Tabbed Bar. You can make the fraction full size, using the formula template, or you can make a case fraction using the template. When you're done, we're ready to create the

8. Creating this formula doesn't require any new techniques that you don't already know, so we're not going to give you the usual step-by-step instructions. Here are a few useful hints and reminders: You can insert by clicking on it in the Small Bar, which is much faster than using the by clicking on it in the Large Tabbed Bar. is to insert by inserting , drag across the to select it, and type Y to replace it. palette.

You can insert the term A fast way to create You can create

and replacing the subscript template with a sub/superscript template. To do this,

select the subscript slot as shown below, and hold down the Ctrl key as you insert the template. The Ctrl key causes the new template to replace the selected one instead of wrapping around it. Then type 2 in the superscript slot.

Note that the two terms inside curly brackets on the bottom line of the formula are identical except that one involves X and the other involves Y. To create the second term, just duplicate the first one and replace the X's with Y's. You can duplicate a term by selecting it, holding down the Ctrl key and dragging it to the desired location (without the Ctrl key the term is moved). Rearranging the Toolbar MathType's toolbar is initially filled with expressions useful for many of the various fields in mathematics. You can, however, create your own tabs, rename or delete the existing tabs, as well as rearrange or remove any of the symbols or expressions that are in the default toolbar. You can also modify any of the expressions if they're not quite right for your particular use. To move a symbol or expression within the toolbar, hold down the Alt key and drag the item to its new location. You can insert an item between two others by dropping it between them. 9. Try this by dragging the symbol we added to the Small Bar in Step 3 to the Small Tabbed Bar. The choice of where to place an item is entirely up to you; a symbol or expression can be placed in any of the bars. Now let's delete the from the Small Tabbed Bar.

Deleting Toolbar Items Another way to delete an item is to Alt-drag it from the bar and release the mouse over an invalid target, e.g., outside the MathType window. 10. Right-click on the and select Delete from the context menu that appears. You may also want to delete the other expressions you added to the tabbed bars. You can also change the names of the tabs to suit your particular situation. 11. Double-click on the Statistics tab to open the Tab Properties dialog, where you can edit the tab's name and change its keyboard shortcut. If you prefer typing to using the mouse, you may want to use the toolbar's keyboard interface. You can give the keyboard focus to a toolbar component using the following keyboard commands: Symbol Palette Template Palette Small Bar Large Tabbed Bar F5 F6 F7 F8

Small Tabbed Bar

F9

Once a bar has the focus, you can use the left and right arrows to move the selection, and Enter to insert the selected item (or open its corresponding menu). The Esc key closes a menu, or returns the focus to the equation area. You can switch tabs by typing Ctrl+F10, n where n is the number of the tab to activate. For example, typing Ctrl+F10, 2 activates the second tab. Deciding What to Place in the Toolbar Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts are covered in more detail in Customizing the Keyboard. Some symbols and templates are used so frequently that you may not need to place them in the toolbar. You probably will have memorized the keyboard shortcuts for inserting them, so there's not much to be gained by having them occupy valuable space in the toolbar. Greek symbols in particular fall into this category; once you've learned that you can insert a by pressing Ctrl+G followed by b (referred to as Ctrl+G,B), you probably won't need to add these characters to the toolbar. Insert Symbol Dialog Using this dialog is covered in more detail in Inserting Unusual Symbols. It may make sense, however, to add characters from any special fonts you may have to the toolbar. The easiest method is to use the Insert Symbol dialog (choose the Insert Symbol command on the Edit menu), which is an extremely powerful tool for viewing the characters in a font. You can also Alt-drag characters from this dialog to the toolbar. You can add as many characters from your fonts to the toolbar as can fit. Then you can enter these characters at any time into your equations, regardless of your current style definitions. That does it for Using MathType's Toolbar, so choose Select All (Ctrl+A) from the Edit menu and press Backspace or Delete to clear the window for the next tutorial.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Spacing and Alignment


In our next example we introduce some of MathType's facilities for controlling spacing and alignment in equations. We are going to create the following pair of equations:

Note that these equations are arranged so that their signs are vertically aligned, and they both contain a "lim sup" construction of a type that we have not used before. You can create these equations as follows: Expanding Integrals Integral signs are normally a constant size. You can create an expanding integral by holding down the Shift key while you choose an integral template from the integrals palette. 1. Insert a definite integral template by clicking on the icon or by pressing Ctrl+I, type in the integrand (the large slot), and fill in the 0 and 1 as the limits of integration (the two small slots). You probably won't want the parentheses in the integrand to be of the "expanding" variety, so you can just type them from the keyboard, rather than using the now look like this: template. Your equation should

Parentheses Template You may prefer to use the template instead of typing ( and ). Using the template can give your document a more consistent look. The template also includes more space around it, so you may not need to add the thin space as shown here. We're trying to teach you the different ways to create equations; obviously the final choice is up to you! 2. To improve the appearance of our equation, we should insert a thin space (one sixth of an em) in between the ( ) and the in the integrand. MathType can not do this automatically, so we provide you with a convenient way of manually entering a space of the correct size. The table. Icon Keystroke Shift+Space Ctrl+Alt+Space Ctrl+Space Ctrl+Shift+Space None palette provides a set of five icons representing commonly used spaces, as shown in the following

Alt. Keystroke Ctrl+K,0 Ctrl+K,1 Ctrl+K,2 Ctrl+K,3 Ctrl+K,4

Description Zero space One point space Thin space (sixth of an em) Thick space (third of an em) Em space (quad) icon (it's on

Place the insertion point between the ")" and the "d" by clicking there, and insert a thin space either by choosing the the right in the top row of the palette) or by pressing Ctrl+Spacebar.

Show Nesting The Show Nesting command on the View menu shows the different slots and can help you avoid making mistakes. 3. Move the insertion point out of the integrand slot, into the position shown below. You must do this for the alignment commands to work properly. Don't create the rest of the equation within the integrand slot.

4. Click on the

sign in the Small Bar.

5. Now we want to build the "lim sup" structure. We begin by clicking on the icon in the Palette. This icon represents an underscript template: any characters entered in the upper slot will be full size, and those in the lower slot will be reduced to

"subscript" size. 6. The insertion point is positioned in the upper slot, so you can type in limsup. MathType will use your "Function" style (probably a plain style) for these characters, and will insert a thin space between the "lim" and the "sup". 7. Move the insertion point down into the lower slot by clicking in it or by pressing the Tab key, and enter n . The and symbols are very common in mathematics, so they've been added to MathType's default Small Bar. They're also available in the Symbol Palettes, of course. Following typesetting conventions (as always), MathType will not create any spacing around the symbol, since it is in a "subscript," but you can insert spaces, if you want to. One-Shot Shortcuts The shortcuts that affect just the next character typed are described in more detail in Keyboard Modifiers (oneshots). 8. Press Tab to move the insertion point out of the lower slot, and type in the rest of this first equation. The speedy way to do this is to just type Ctrl+G f Ctrl+L n Tab ( a ). If you like the Ctrl+G shortcut, you may be interested to know that there are a few others that work in a similar fashion. If you press Ctrl+U, for example, the next character you type will be assigned the User 1 style that you have defined with the Define command on the Style menu. In this way, you can access any character in any font with just two keystrokes, even if it's not present in the Symbol Palettes. 9. Press the Enter key. This will create a new line directly beneath the first equation, so now you have a "pile" consisting of two lines. It should look like this:

Selecting a Slot You can double-click in a slot to select its contents, or type Ctrl+Shift+S. 10. To save time, we're going to create the second equation by modifying a copy of the first one. Select the entire first equation by double-clicking somewhere near its sign, copy it to the clipboard, and then paste it into the new empty slot. You should now have two identical copies of the first equation, one directly beneath the other. Now just edit the lower copy to produce the second equation. To change the to a just select the and press Ctrl+G followed by y. 11. Finally, we're going to experiment with some different ways of aligning the two equations. You can center or right-justify them by using the Align Center and Align Right commands on the Format menu. Give this a try, just to see how it looks. 12. In fact, you will probably want to align these two equations so that their signs are directly above one another. To do this, we choose the Align at = command from the Format menu. It will work even though we have signs rather than = signs. You can align the equations in other ways by using alignment symbols. You simply insert an alignment symbol in each equation at the two points that you'd like to have aligned. (However, note that alignment symbols inserted into template slots will not work.) Placing an alignment symbol to the right of each of the two signs would give the same results as using the Align at = command, for instance. The alignment symbol is represented by the icon in the Symbol Palettes - it's located in the palette. 13. You may also want to adjust the line spacing, or leading, (i.e., the amount of vertical space between the two equations). You can do this by placing the insertion point somewhere in the outermost slot of the second equation (not within a template), or by selecting the second equation, and choosing the Line Spacing command from the Format menu. When you've arranged them to your liking, the equations are complete. Now that we're done with these equations, it's time to choose Select All from the Edit menu and press Backspace to clear your window for the next tutorial.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

A Simple Matrix
In our next tutorial, we illustrate MathType's powerful capabilities for laying out matrices. We will construct the following matrix equation:

The matrix is a fairly simple one, and we'll be able to create it very easily by using a matrix template. If you need more flexible formatting capabilities for matrices and tabular layouts, you should use tabs, as illustrated in Setting up a Microsoft Word Document. 1. Type the first few terms of the equation, up to the second equals sign. MathType will recognize that "det" is an abbreviation for the determinant function, and will automatically set it in plain roman type, so you don't have to fiddle with it. The quick way to get a is to press Ctrl+G followed by a letter l (ell). Also, note that the I and the A represent matrices, so we have assigned them the Vector-Matrix style, which causes them to appear in bold type. The Ctrl+B shortcut will assign the Vector-Matrix style to the next character, so you can press Ctrl+B followed by I to get the I , and Ctrl+B followed by A for the A. Alternatively, you can just type all the characters first, and then select them and change their styles using the commands on the Style menu. Either way, your equation should end up looking like this:

2. Type the second = sign and insert a vertical bar template by choosing the 3. Insert a 2 2 matrix template inside the vertical bars by choosing the look like this:

icon. It's located in the

palette.

icon from the

palette. Your equation should now

4. The insertion point will be in the top left slot of the 2 2 matrix, so enter the expression

- a11 there.

Drag and Drop You can also drag the term and drop it in the other slots. Remember to hold down the Ctrl key to copy the term. 5. We're feeling lazy, so we're going to create the other entries in the matrix by cutting and pasting. Select the a11 by doubleclicking on it, copy it to the Clipboard, and paste it into the other three slots in the matrix. The result should be as shown below; it's not right, of course, but we're going to fix it up in a few moments.

6. Next, we're going to put a little extra space between the vertical bars and the elements of the matrix. This is purely a matter of taste, so you can skip this part if you'd prefer to keep your matrix looking the way it does at present. Before we enter the spaces, we need to position the insertion point so that it's inside the vertical bars but to the left of and outside the matrix. You can do this by clicking somewhere near the position indicated by the arrow pointer in the preceding picture. Then just enter one or two thin spaces by pressing Ctrl+Spacebar. Do the same on the right-hand side of the matrix. If you choose the Show All command from the View menu, you'll be able to see your spaces. They should look like this:

7. After the brief digression in Step 6, it's now time to correct the entries in our matrix. First, delete the from the upper right slot. The quickest way to do this is to place the insertion point to the right of it and press Backspace. Do the same with the in the lower left slot. Notice that MathType adjusts the spacing after the minus signs to reflect the fact that they are now unary operators rather than binary operators (negation rather than subtraction). 8. Change all the subscripts in the matrix to their desired values. The "11" in the upper left slot is correct already, but we should have "12" in the upper right slot, "21" in the lower left, and "22" in the lower right. You can double-click on the existing subscripts to select them, and then type the correct values over them, just as you would in a word processor. Your equation should now look like this:

Modifying a Matrix The Matrix submenu on the Format menu contains commands for adding and deleting rows and columns. 9. The equation is now essentially complete, although there are a few more formatting options that you may want to try out. First, you might want to shift the entire matrix down so that its top row is aligned with the rest of the equation. To do this, place the insertion point anywhere in the matrix and choose Align at Top from the Format menu. Also, it might be nice to right justify the entries in each column. To do this, place the insertion point somewhere in the matrix, choose the Change Matrix command from the Matrix submenu on the Format menu, and click on the button labeled "Right" in the dialog box. Finally, if you object to the fact that MathType tightened the spacing after the unary minus signs, you can put the spaces back in again, though this would mean deviating from standard typesetting conventions. They should be thick spaces (one third of an em). The thick space is the middle one in the second row of the palette. If you prefer to use the keyboard, you can insert a thick space by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Space. Alternatively, since a thick space is the same width as two thin spaces, you can get the same results by pressing Ctrl+Space twice. If you elected to make all of the modifications suggested in this step, your equation should look something like the picture below.

If you're going on to the next tutorial, press Ctrl+A to select all, then press Backspace or Delete to clear your screen.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word


This tutorial describes how to use the MathType commands for numbering equations in Microsoft Word documents. Although Word has its own method for numbering equations (captions), Word places captions above or below an item, not to the side, which is typically how equations are numbered. Using the MathType toolbar that's added to Word, you can enter inline, display and numbered display equations with just one click. We're going to create the following portion of a document to illustrate the equation numbering commands.

However, we're going to create it in a slightly unrealistic sequence, in order to illustrate the power and flexibility of the numbering commands. 1. Run Microsoft Word and create a new document. 2. Enter the following text: We now have two basic equations: 3. Click on the button on Word's MathType toolbar, or choose the Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation command on the MathType menu. 4. A dialog will appear asking if you want to create a new chapter/section break at the start of this document. We'll explain the meaning of this later in the tutorial. For now, just click OK. Word Styles Used The line containing the equation is formatted with Word's MTDisplayEquation style, which you can modify to affect all display equations in your document. 5. In the MathType window that opens, enter the following equation:

then close the MathType window. In your Word document, notice that the equation is centered and the equation number is aligned with the right margin. 6. Repeat step 3 and insert the following equation into your Word document:

7. Enter the following text at the start of the next line: Subtracting Equation References You can jump to an equation in your document quickly by double-clicking on any of its references. Then press Shift+F5 to jump back to the reference. In large documents try splitting your window into two panes (search for in Word's Help). Insert the references in one pane and scroll and double-click on the equation numbers in the other. You can place equation number references in footnotes and endnotes. 8. Now let's insert a reference to the second display equation. Click the button on the MathType toolbar or choose the Insert Equation Reference command on the MathType menu. The Insert Equation Reference dialog will appear, displaying brief instructions about inserting an equation number reference. Once you are familiar with the process you can click the "Don't show me again" box. For now, click OK, then double-click on the equation number (1.2). You'll see that the number (1.2) is inserted into your sentence. 9. Type from and then enter a reference to equation (1.1) using the method described in step 8. You may want to enter a space before and after the reference. 10. Then type gives and insert the following numbered display equation:

11. At the start of the following line, type Using and insert a reference to equation (1.3). Complete the line by typing we can show that 12. Click the button on Word's MathType toolbar, or choose the Insert Inline Equation command on the MathType menu, and insert the following equation:

Notice how this equation is inserted in the line of text (hence the name baseline of the text. Your document should now look like this:

). Word also aligns the equation with the

Now we'll insert another equation in the middle of this example to demonstrate automatic renumbering. 13. Place the insertion point before the word Subtracting, and enter the following text: Adding these two together, we obtain Equation Numbers You can insert just an equation number using the Insert Equation Number command. 14. Insert this numbered display equation:

You'll see that the new equation is numbered (1.3), and the following equation number and its reference have been renumbered to (1.4). Your document should now look like the example at the start of this tutorial. If Updating Is Slow If updating takes too long, uncheck "Update equation numbers automatically" in the Format Equation Numbers dialog. Then use the Update Equation Numbers command to manually update the numbers. Whenever you insert an equation number or an equation reference, all numbers in the document are updated. However, if you move or delete an equation number, you must use the Update Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu to regenerate the number sequence. Also, be aware that deleting an equation number does not automatically delete any of its references; you'll have to do this yourself. You can find them by using the Update Equation Numbers command, which will cause Word to display an error message in place of each reference. You can then delete them. Equation Number Formats You can also control the format of the equation numbers. Whole Document To change the format of existing equation numbers you must check the Whole Document checkbox. Otherwise you're only setting the format for the next number(s) you insert. 15. Choose the Format Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu (there's no toolbar button for this command). Check the Whole Document checkbox (to change the existing numbers) and change the Enclosure option to <> (angle brackets). The preview shows you the result of your settings. Click OK, and you'll see the equation numbers and references change to the new format. You may want to experiment with some of the settings - there are many possible combinations. Chapter/Section Breaks Section Numbers If you don't want section numbers included, you can turn them off in the Format Equation Numbers dialog. The default equation number format includes a section number and an equation number, e.g., (1.1). You can also include a chapter number if needed. The chapter and section numbers are determined by the nearest preceding Chapter/Section Break in your document. You insert and modify these breaks using commands on the MathType menu. We already inserted one at the start of this document as part of inserting the first equation number. Now we'll change its value. Show Chapter/Section Breaks You can show and hide chapter/section breaks by clicking on the the MTEquationSection style.

button in Word's toolbar. This shows and hides

16. Choose the Modify Chapter/Section Break command on the MathType menu. The location of the section break will be highlighted and the Modify Chapter/Section Break dialog will open. Let's assume we're working on Section 2 of a book, so we want the section number to be 2 and the equation number to be 1. Choose the "Section number:" button and enter 2. The "Next" option can be useful if your document contains several sections and you want them numbered sequentially. (Remember that there's no link between Word's sections and MathType's chapter/section breaks. It's up to you to associate them by placing the breaks in the appropriate places in your document). Now click OK. The chapter/section break will be hidden, and the equation numbers in the document will all start with 2. If you've followed these steps your document should look something like this:

MathType's equation numbering commands can also support three levels of numbering, e.g., chapter, section and equation numbers. You can also control the format of the numbers and create your own custom formats. The following tutorial shows you how to do this; we'll use the document we created in this tutorial so don't delete it!

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Advanced Equation Numbering in Microsoft Word


The simple equation numbering example shown in the previous tutorial is sufficient for many documents, but sometimes you may need to create a third level of numbers. For example your document may require chapter, section and equation numbers. Or, you may find that the built-in number formats don't match your needs and you'd like to create a custom number format. This tutorial shows you how to accomplish both tasks. 1. Open the document you created in the previous tutorial. 2. Open the Format Equation Numbers dialog by choosing the Format Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu.

3. The settings should appear as shown above. The top group of items controls the number format. We want to add a chapter number, so check the "Chapter Number" checkbox. Notice how the preview changes to <1.1.1>). 4. Check the "Whole document" checkbox so that the changes we make will be applied to existing equation numbers. Then click OK. You'll notice that the document has changed, and the equation numbers now read <1.2.1>, <1.2.2> etc. This is because the chapter/section break at the start of the document sets the chapter number to 1. This was added to the document when we inserted the first equation number. Let's pretend we want to set this to be Chapter 2. 5. Choose the Modify Chapter/Section Break command on the MathType menu, and the following dialog will open. You'll see that the break itself has also been made visible in the Word document.

6. Change the Chapter number value to 2 and click OK. The numbers in the document should now read <2.2.1>, <2.2.2> etc.

Now let's try changing the format of the numbers more dramatically. We'll set the format so that the numbers read Equation 2.2.1, Equation 2.2.2 etc. 7. Choose the Format Equation Numbers command on the MathType menu. Select the Advanced Format radio button, and enter Equation #C1.#S1.#E1 in the edit box. You'll see how the Preview changes. 8. Check the "Whole document" checkbox, and click OK. The equation numbers in the document should be updated. You can experiment with different custom formats in this manner. The 'language' used for the formats is very simple, all characters are used literally except for the constructs #Cx, #Sx and #Ex, where x indicates the numeric representation and can be one of 1, a, A, i, I. A fast way of learning how to control the formatting is to select the Simple Format button, and then change the various options. The Advanced Format text is still visible, and it updates every time you make a change to the built-in formats. Full details are in the Help for this dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2007 Document


When creating a Microsoft Word document containing equations there are several considerations you should keep in mind. You'll probably want the body text to match the equations in terms of fonts and sizes, and you'll typically want all equations in the document to use consistent formatting, i.e. the same font and size settings, as well as any other special settings you may have made in MathType. This tutorial shows you how to achieve these goals, and how to update the document's equations if you decide to change your fonts and/or sizes. Word's Styles If you're not familiar with Word's styles we urge you to take a few minutes to learn how to use them. In Word's Help Contents, search for styles. Although Word and MathType allow you to select text and change its font and size directly, we strongly recommend that you make use of styles, instead. Both programs use this approach because it makes modifying the look of a document or equation very easy. You simply change the definition of a style (e.g., from Times New Roman to Arial, or from 12 pt plain to 10 pt italic), and your document or equation is immediately reformatted with the new settings. Let's assume that you're required to produce a document where the body font is 10 pt Times New Roman. The first step is to define MathType's settings to match the Word document. 1. In MathType, open the Define Styles dialog and set the main font to Times New Roman using either the Simple or Advanced pane. Make sure the "Use for new equations" box is checked, and click OK. Factory Settings Click "Factory settings" to reset the values. 2. Open the Define Sizes dialog and set the Full size to 10 pt. As the other dimensions are by default expressed as percentages, MathType will calculate them for you. Again, check the "Use for new equations" option, and click OK. Equation Preferences The definitions of all the styles, sizes, and spacing used in an equation are referred to collectively as "equation preferences". See Equation Preferences sub-menu for more details. 3. Back in Word, choose the Equation Preferences command in the Format group on the MathType tab. Make sure the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" option is selected. This means that whenever you create a new equation using the commands on the Insert Equations group, the settings MathType is currently set to use for new equations are the ones that will be used. Click OK to close this dialog. Note: you may not always want to rely on MathType's 'New Equation' preferences. If you tend to change MathType's size and style definitions quite often, you may want to create a MathType preference file, and then choose this file in the Set Equation Preferences dialog. This will copy the file's preferences into your Word document, so that no matter what changes you make to MathType, equations created in your document will always use these preferences. 4. Now we'll quickly create a Word style for the body of the document. Click the Dialog Box Launcher in the lower right-hand

corner of the Styles group on the Home tab. In the lower left-hand corner of the Styles dialog, click New Style . In the Create New Style from Formatting dialog, name the new style "body". You'll probably base it on Word's built-in Normal style. Set the new style's font to Times New Roman 10 pt by making the appropriate selections in the Formatting section of the dialog. Don't click OK yet. 5. Click on the Format button in the lower left-hand corner of the dialog. Choose Paragraph. On the dialog's Indents and Spacing tab, change the Line Spacing option to Single. Click OK to close the dialog. 6. Click OK to close the New Style dialog, and then click the X to close the Style dialog. You've now configured Word and MathType to use the same font and size definitions, which will make equations closely match the look of the rest of the document. Go ahead and enter a line or two of text and insert a simple equation. Now let's suppose that, as so frequently happens, you have to change the document's font to Garamond. To keep this example simple we won't change the point size, but you'd follow the same steps if this were the case. These are the changes we need to make: Modify Word's "body" style to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman. Modify MathType's styles to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman. Update the existing equations in the document to use the new font. The first two steps are very similar to how we originally created the styles and added them to the Word document, so we won't

go through them in detail. The first step involves using Word's Style dialog (right-click on Body in the Styles group, and choose Modify), the second step requires MathType's Define Styles dialog. The third step involves the Format Equations command on the Ribbon's MathType tab. 7. Choose the Format Equations command, and the Format Equations dialog will appear. This dialog allows you to reformat the equations in your document, and provides you with several ways to determine the equation preferences that are applied. The choices are: The equation preferences already stored in this document. MathType's current equation preferences for new equations. The equation preferences contained in a MathType equation you've copied to the clipboard. The equation preferences contained in a MathType preference file. TIP See Set Equation Preferences Dialog for more details on the other options. For this example click the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" button. You can click Preview to get a list of the actual preferences. 8. Click OK and the formatting process will start. This can take anywhere from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the speed of your computer and the number of equations in your document. The command's progress is shown in Word's status bar. When the operation has finished, check that the equations were updated.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Setting Up a Microsoft Word 2000, 2002 or 2003 Document


When creating a Microsoft Word document containing equations there are several considerations you should keep in mind. You'll probably want the body text to match the equations in terms of fonts and sizes, and you'll typically want all equations in the document to use consistent formatting, i.e. the same font and size settings, as well as any other special settings you may have made in MathType. This tutorial shows you how to achieve these goals, and how to update the document's equations if you decide to change your fonts and/or sizes. Word's Styles If you're not familiar with Word's styles we urge you to take a few minutes to learn how to use them. In Word's Help Contents, search for styles. Although Word and MathType allow you to select text and change its font and size directly, we strongly recommend that you make use of styles, instead. Both programs use this approach because it makes modifying the look of a document or equation very easy. You simply change the definition of a style (e.g., from Times New Roman to Arial, or from 12 pt plain to 10 pt italic), and your document or equation is immediately reformatted with the new settings. Let's assume that you're required to produce a document where the body font is 10 pt Times New Roman. The first step is to define MathType's settings to match the Word document. 1. In MathType, open the Define Styles dialog and set the main font to Times New Roman using either the Simple or Advanced pane. Make sure the "Use for new equations" box is checked, and click OK. Factory Settings Click "Factory settings" to reset the values. 2. Open the Define Sizes dialog and set the Full size to 10 pt. As the other dimensions are by default expressed as percentages, MathType will calculate them for you. Again, check the "Use for new equations" option, and click OK. Equation Preferences The definitions of all the styles, sizes, and spacing used in an equation are referred to collectively as "equation preferences". See Equation Preferences sub-menu for more details. 3. Back in Word, choose the Set Equation Preferences command on the MathType menu. Make sure the "MathType's 'New Equation' preferences" option is selected. This means that whenever you create a new equation using the commands on the MathType menu or MathType toolbar, the settings MathType is currently set to use for new equations are the ones that will be used. Click OK to close this dialog. Note: you may not always want to rely on MathType's 'New Equation' preferences. If you tend to change MathType's size and style definitions quite often, you may want to create a MathType preference file, and then choose this file in the Set Equation Preferences dialog. This will copy the file's preferences into your Word document, so that no matter what changes you make to MathType, equations created in your document will always use these preferences. 4. Now we'll quickly create a Word style for the body of the document. Choose the Style command on Word's Format menu, click New and name the new style "body". You'll probably base it on Word's built-in normal style. Set the new style's font to Times New Roman 10 pt by clicking on the Format button and choosing Font. Click OK to close the Font dialog. Line Spacing For a more detailed discussion of this issue see Support for Microsoft Word. 5. Click on the Format button again and this time choose Paragraph. In the dialog's Indents and Spacing page, change the Line Spacing option to Single. Click OK to close the dialog. 6. Click OK to close the New Style dialog, and then click Apply to close the Style dialog. You've now configured Word and MathType to use the same font and size definitions, which will make equations closely match the look of the rest of the document. Go ahead and enter a line or two of text and insert a simple equation. Now let's suppose that, as so frequently happens, you have to change the document's font to Garamond. To keep this example simple we won't change the point size, but you'd follow the same steps if this were the case. These are the changes we need to make: Modify Word's "body" style to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman. Modify MathType's styles to use Garamond instead of Times New Roman. Update the existing equations in the document to use the new font. The first two steps are very similar to how we originally created the styles and added them to the Word document, so we won't go through them in detail. The first step involves using Word's Style dialog, the second step requires MathType's Define Styles

dialog. The third step involves the Format Equations command on the MathType menu. 7. Choose the Format Equations command, and the Format Equations dialog will appear. This dialog allows you to reformat the equations in your document, and provides you with several ways to determine the equation preferences that are applied. The choices are: The equation preferences already stored in this document. MathType's current equation preferences for new equations. The equation preferences contained in a MathType equation you've copied to the clipboard. The equation preferences contained in a MathType preference file. TIP See Set Equation Preferences Dialog for more details on the other options. For this example click the "MathType's 'New Equations' preferences" button. You can click Preview to get a list of the actual preferences. 8. Click OK and the formatting process will start. This can take anywhere from a few seconds to several minutes depending on the speed of your computer and the number of equations in your document. The command's progress is shown in Word's status bar. When the operation has finished, check that the equations were updated.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Formatting with Tabs


In this example we show you how MathType's system of tabs provides extra flexibility for formatting equations. We're going to create the equation:

and then format it several different ways. We proceed as follows: 1. Create the expression on the left-hand side of the equals sign. As you know by now, you can choose the Ctrl+L to attach the subscript to the . 2. Choose the template from the template or press

palette to insert an expanding left brace. You should now have the following:

3. Enter the top expression in the brace, up to and including the , and then press Ctrl+Tab (press the Tab key while holding down the Ctrl key). If you press the Tab key alone, this will move the insertion point, rather than insert a tab character. Choosing Styles Another way to choose a style is to right-click in the Style panel of the status bar and select the style from the context menu that appears. 4. Choose the Text style from the Style menu and type in when n is even. While you're using the Text style, the spacebar is active and you have to type spaces, as you would in a word processor. Choose Show All from the View menu, if it's not already checked, so that you can see your tab character, which is displayed as a small diamond. Also, choose Ruler from the View menu if it's not already checked. Your equation should look like this:

Note that the tab character causes the phrase "when n is even" to line up underneath the first default tab stop to the right of the . The default tab stops (indicated by small inverted T's along the Ruler scale) are positioned at half-inch intervals starting at the left-hand side of the current slot. Since we are currently within the main slot of the measured from the left edge of this slot, i.e. just to the left of . 5. Press Enter to start a new line underneath the first one, and type in its contents. You should switch back to the Math style to enter 14.3x. Insert a tab character (Ctrl+Tab) after the x, as in the first line. Now switch back to Text again to type when n is odd. This should give you: template, the half-inch intervals are

Again, the text phrase aligns with the first default tab stop to the right of the . Note that you have created a two-line pile within the template, and that each pile in MathType has its own tab stops.

Changing Styles Remember you can also use the keyboard shortcuts listed on the Style menu, or right-click on the Status Bar's Style panel. 6. Select the n in the first line and choose Math from the Style menu. This makes MathType interpret the n as a mathematical quantity, i.e. a variable, and will therefore apply the Variable style (typically italic). Do the same to the n in the second line. 7. Place the insertion point somewhere within one of the two lines on the right-hand side of the equation, click on the tab well, and then click on the Ruler at about the 1 inch mark to set a left tab stop. This will remove all default tab stops to the left of the new tab stop. Your equation should now be aligned as shown below:

If this is how we want the equation formatted, then our work is finished. However, there are several other options that are worth exploring. 8. First, we're going to align the two x's. Insert a tab character (Ctrl+Tab) at the start of each of the two lines. This will cause each line to be shifted so that its left-hand side aligns with the left tab stop. The text phrase in each line, since it is separated by another tab character, will align with the first available default tab stop to the right of the . 9. Next, click on the following results: tab well, and then click on the Ruler just to the left of the previous tab stop. This should produce the

You can now change the formatting easily by just dragging the tab stops around on the Ruler. 10. Next, we're going to align the two decimal points. To prepare for this, first remove the tab by dragging it downwards away from the Ruler and then releasing the mouse button. Next, click on the tab well, and then click on the Ruler at around the one inch mark to set a decimal tab stop. Your equation should end up looking like this:

That's it for this tutorial, so delete your equation to be ready for the next tutorial.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Inserting Unusual Symbols


In this tutorial, you'll learn how to use MathType's Insert Symbol dialog to locate and use symbols that are not readily available in the built-in palettes. Suppose, for example, that you are going to be writing a document about some newly-invented operations on sets that are analogous to conventional union and intersection. You will want to find symbols to represent your new set operations, and it would be nice if these were similar to the conventional and symbols. Your first attempt might be to use bold versions of the conventional symbols to represent your new operations, like this:

Unfortunately, the bold symbols look too much like the regular ones, so we'll try to find a better solution. 1. Create the equations as shown above. 2. From MathType's Edit menu, choose Insert Symbol. The following dialog will appear:

This dialog is somewhat similar to the one in Microsoft Word, and to the Windows Character Map accessory, which you may already know how to use. Getting Detailed Help To get detailed information about the Insert Symbol dialog, click on the Help button near its upper right-hand corner. You can use the Insert Symbol dialog to browse all the fonts available on your computer, and investigate MathType's knowledge of them. Specifically, you can: Insert a specific character or mathematical symbol into your equation. Add a frequently used symbol to the toolbar. Add a keyboard shortcut for a frequently used symbol. Find a symbol by matching words in its description. 3. The first place to look for usable symbols is the Symbol font, so select Symbol from the list of fonts near the top of the Insert Symbol dialog. A quick way to locate a font is to click on the list and then type the first letter or two of the font's name. Once the desired font is selected you can scroll through the large grid of characters in the center of the dialog, looking for likely prospects. Larger Symbol Display To enlarge the characters in the Insert Symbol dialog, choose Workspace Preferences from MathType's Preferences menu, and set Toolbar size to Medium or Large. 4. You might also look in the Euclid Symbol and Wingdings fonts. Note that the Insert Symbol dialog tells you that Symbol and Euclid Symbol have the same "encoding" (arrangement of characters). So, if you don't find the characters you need in one of these two fonts, you won't find them in the other, either. 5. The Insert Symbol dialog actually provides a more intelligent way to search for the characters you need, rather just browsing

through fonts. In the View by field, choose Description. Click on the New Search button, type the word union, and choose OK. The grid of characters will now show you several union-like symbols. 6. In the Insert Symbol dialog, uncheck "Show one of each" to see all the characters on your computer that MathType knows about, and which have the word "union" in their names. Depending on which fonts you have installed, there may be a few dozen such characters. If you are overwhelmed by the vast array of characters shown, click on "Show one of each" to reduce the number. This causes the dialog to display only one character (from the first font that contains it) for each description matched by the search criteria. 7. Click on a few of the promising-looking union characters, to see what MathType can tell you about them. Among other things, MathType will give you a description of the character, the font in which it was found, and the corresponding keystroke. 8. One of the characters you should see is a double union symbol from the Euclid Math Two font. Let's assume that we want to use this, provided we can find a corresponding symbol for intersection. 9. Using the techniques outlined above, search for symbols with "intersection" in their names. You should find a double intersection symbol , again in the Euclid Math Two font. Choosing Fonts A quick way is to click in the list and then type the first letter of the name. You can also use the scroll bar in the list to move around quickly. 10. In the "View by" list choose Font, and select Euclid Math Two from the list of fonts near the top of the Insert Symbol dialog. Scroll down to the bottom of the character grid until you see the and symbols. Nearby in the character grid, you will see the square-shaped union and intersection symbols, and . Our search did not find these because their names are derived from the Unicode standard, which calls them "square cup" and "square cap" respectively. Keyboard Shortcuts The Insert Symbol dialog allows you to assign a keyboard shortcut to any character in any font. 11. You can click on Insert to insert symbols directly from the Insert Symbol dialog. However, if you're going to be using them repeatedly, you'll want to place them on one of MathType's bars for easier access. Press (and hold down) the Alt key and drag the character from the grid in the Insert Symbol dialog to the Small Bar. Then do the same for the symbol. See Using MathType's Toolbar for more information about working with MathType's toolbars. 12. Edit your equations to use the new symbols:

MathType knows all about the Euclid Math Two font, so it realizes that the and symbols are binary operators, just like and and it puts the correct spacing around them automatically. If you use characters from more obscure fonts, you'll have to take a few extra steps to get this automatic spacing to work. To learn more about MathType's knowledge of fonts, and how you can extend it, see Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Creating Webpages with Microsoft Word


The Publish to MathPage command provides the easiest way to convert Microsoft Word documents containing equations into webpages. It's based on Word's Save as webpage command, but solves the problems this command has handling equations. Creating Webpages with MathPage contains more details on the background behind this process; this tutorial will show you how easy it is to produce great-looking technical webpages. 1. Open Microsoft Word and create a new document containing the following:

Create the equations using Insert Inline Equation and Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation. Create the reference using Insert Equation Reference. Refer to Spacing and Alignment if you don't remember how to align the two lines of the display equation. Save As Webpage vs. Exporting or Publishing Word's Save as Web Page command saves the current document as a webpage and keeps it open for editing. You have a document that can be viewed in a Web browser and opened in Word. MathPage or a webpage, which means that you end up with two documents; the original Word document, and the webpage itself (which is not editable in Word). 2. Save the Word document, naming it MathPageTutorial.doc. Then choose Publish to MathPage on the MathType menu (you can also click on the button on the MathType toolbar) or the MathType tab. The following dialog will appear:

You'll see the Title has already been filled in with the document's Title property. You can modify this if you wish; the text will be displayed in the browser window's title bar, and saved in the Word document's Title property. 3. Make sure the other settings in the dialog are as shown above. If you and your audience aren't using Internet Explorer 5 or newer, click the "All browsers" radio button. 4. Click OK. You'll notice some activity on the screen, and a progress dialog that indicates the status of the exporting process. It shouldn't take more than a few seconds for a small document like this. Your default browser will open, displaying a page which should look almost identical to your original Word document. If it didn't open, or you didn't have this option checked, start your browser and open the file you just generated (most browsers have an Open command for this purpose). Discovering MathZoom You may want to add a note to your website explaining how MathZoom works so that your audience will know to click on the equations to zoom them. 5. In your browser, notice how the inline equations are perfectly aligned with the surrounding text. Now let's try the MathZoom feature. Move the mouse pointer over one of the equations and click. You'll see a magnified version of the equation appear. This

allows you to clearly see small items such as subscripts, superscripts and embellishments, even when the text is small. You can zoom in on as many equations as you like. Click again on an equation to revert back to its normal size. You can close all zoomed equations by holding down the Shift key and clicking in one of the zoomed equations. This feature is controlled by the MathZoom checkbox in the MathPage dialog. You may want to disable it for documents where the zoom feature isn't useful, for example when the equations are already large. Also, documents containing a large number (>100) of equations may download slightly faster with MathZoom turned off. Otherwise, we suggest you always leave MathZoom on. 6. Print the webpage using the browser's Print command. Notice how nicely the equations appear, and that they match the quality of the document's text. Even though MathPage is using GIF images the equations print with laser-printer quality. Copying Equations The ability to drag an equation to MathType can be very useful, but you cannot use it to modify the webpage! MathPage generates multiple versions of each equation, and you'd have to edit all of them identically for this to work. To modify the equations you should edit the original Word document and run the MathPage command again. 7. If you're using Internet Explorer, click and drag one of the equations to a MathType window. A new MathType window opens containing the equation. This great feature means that you and people who view your pages can make use of the equations without having to re-create them. You'll see that the equation number and reference display properly too. Equation number references also act as hyperlinks to the equation number they reference, although you'll need a larger document to see this in action. If you want to experiment some more, you can modify the Word document and run the Publish to MathPage command again. Although it's possible to directly edit the webpage, we strongly recommend that you perform your editing in Word. The generated webpage contains a lot of script blocks and if they're incorrectly modified the page may not display properly in a browser. Try adding some more equations to the text, and perhaps some equation number references. You could also try adding a table to see how it appears in a webpage; in general tables should be used for alignment and layout rather than using tabs. For more information about MathPage see Creating Webpages with MathPage and the MathType website at www.dessci.com .

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Creating Webpages with GIF Files


Publish to MathPage The easiest way to create technical webpages is to use MathType's Publish to MathPage command in Word. See Creating webpages with Microsoft Word and Creating webpages with MathPage for more information. This tutorial teaches you another way to create webpages containing equations. This approach should be used when converting a Word document into a webpage using MathPage is not appropriate. It involves creating GIF equation files and inserting them into your pages. As MathType can output GIF files, it is an excellent tool for this purpose. MathType will even generate the HTML (HyperText Markup Language - the basic language of the Web) needed to link your webpage to the newly generated MathType GIF file. MathType-generated GIF files have several advantages over GIF files produced in other ways: They can be anti-aliased to produce better-looking smoothed edges. They are small (typically being monochrome), allowing for faster downloads. They can be edited at a later date in MathType. People can save the GIF file from the webpage, open it with MathType and then place it into other documents in any of MathType's supported formats including WMF, EPS, LaTeX, MathML (and PICT on Macintosh computers). Inserting a GIF File Into a Document 1. Run MathType and your HTML editing program. 2. In MathType, choose Web and GIF Preferences from the Preferences menu. This dialog contains options for setting the GIF file's resolution (dots per inch), the image's background, and the HTML code to generate when the GIF file is saved. For now, check the "Copy HTML/Text to clipboard on GIF file save" item. 3. Create a simple equation in MathType and choose Save As on the File Menu. 4. Select GIF File Format, type in the file name you desire, and save the equation in the same folder as your HTML document. MathType will generate HTML code for this equation and copy it to the clipboard. 5. Bring your HTML document to the front. 6. Place the insertion point where you want the equation to be inserted. If you are using a text editor you can paste the HTML into your document. If you are using a WYSIWYG HTML editor you will have to use its method for inserting plain HTML code (look for an "Insert HTML" or "View Source" command). 7. Save your HTML document and open it in your Web browser. You will see the equation embedded in your webpage. You can anti-alias MathType equations to improve their appearance in webpages. This technique smoothes their edges and makes them look less jagged. 8. Switch back to MathType, open the Web and GIF Preferences dialog, check "Smooth edges (anti-aliasing)" and then close the dialog. Background Color The Web and GIF Preferences dialog lets you control the background color of the equation, including making it transparent. 9. Save the MathType equation, then switch back to your browser and refresh the current page. You'll see the appearance of the equation change. Anti-aliasing works better for some equations than others (in general it's better on large equations than small ones). The default HTML code generated by MathType includes the GIF filename and its dimensions, and is sufficient for most cases. You can modify this code in the Web and GIF Preferences dialog; consult this dialog's Help for more details. Setting GIF Resolution You can set the resolution of GIF files in the Web and GIF Preferences dialog. Saving an equation as a screen-resolution GIF image provides for fast downloads, but it will not print with laser-printer quality. For better printing, create the GIF at a higher resolution, at the cost of increased download time. For most uses 300 dpi is sufficient; higher resolutions aren't noticeably better unless you're printing on a very high-resolution device. To use a high-resolution GIF, first generate it at a lower resolution, either 96 or 120 dpi. Paste the HTML that MathType generates into your document, this contains the appropriate screen size for the equation in the browser. Now re-save the same file, using the same name but at a higher resolution. When displayed on the screen the browser will scale down the GIF. When printed, it will use the full resolution of the GIF. The screen display may not be as clean as the original low-resolution GIF, as the scaling can introduce jagged edges. You may need to experiment with a few different resolutions. Getting an equation to align with the baseline of the surrounding text can be an art unto itself. It typically involves using Cascading

Style Sheets (CSS) and manual formatting. As standards evolve and Web browsers constantly change, it's difficult to recommend a solution that works in all situations. MathML is a new standard for expressing math in webpages. MathType can generate MathML - see Working with TeX, LaTeX & MathML for more details. Check the MathType website at www.dessci.com for our latest recommendations on this subject.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Customizing the Keyboard


Watch the Status Bar As you move the mouse over items in the palettes, MathType's status bar displays a brief description of the current item, including its keyboard shortcut if one has been defined. MathType has built-in keyboard shortcuts for many of its commands, and the most commonly used symbols and templates. However, you can change any of MathType's shortcuts, and you can also assign your own shortcuts for any items you place on the toolbar. See Keyboard Shortcuts for a complete list of the built-in shortcuts. We'll start by defining a shortcut for a template that doesn't already have one. 1. Let's assume that you have to create several equations that include the template (open brackets). MathType does not define a shortcut for this template. To assign one, first choose the Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences menu. 2. The Customize Keyboard dialog will appear. The panel titled Command: contains a hierarchical list of all the MathType commands that can be assigned keyboard shortcuts. We want to assign one to a toolbar item, so click on the + next to the Toolbar Commands category. An indented list will appear underneath Toolbar Commands. Click on the + next to Templates in this list, and then on the + next to Fence Templates. 3. Select the Open Brackets item (you may have to scroll the list down a little for this item to appear). The template appear in the panel next to the description so you can confirm you've selected the correct template. 4. Click in the edit box labeled "Enter new shortcut key(s)". 5. Type Ctrl+T, followed by [. Notice that a message appears below the box indicating that this shortcut is already assigned to the Left Bracket command. If we were to assign this combination to the Open Brackets template, it would be removed from the Left Bracket command. When assigning new shortcuts always check that you don't accidentally overwrite an existing shortcut. Multiple Shortcuts You can assign more than one shortcut for the same command if you desire. 6. Press backspace once, and then type Alt+[. This time there's no current assignment. Now click the Assign button, and you'll see the shortcut appear in the Current Keys list, as well as being appended to the Open Brackets item in the list of commands. 7. Click Close to close the dialog, then type Ctrl+T followed by Alt+[. You'll see the template appear in the equation window. will

Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog lets you reset a command's shortcut to its default setting by selecting it and clicking Reset Selection. Click Reset All to reset every command's shortcuts back to their original settings. As there are so many commands available in MathType, both one-key and two-key shortcuts are supported. MathType defines shortcuts for many templates using the form Ctrl+T followed by another character, which is why we used this particular combination. Of course, you're free to define your own schemes as you see fit. Assigning a Shortcut to a Toolbar Expression 8. Make sure the Small Tabbed Bar is visible and click on the Algebra tab. We're going to assign a shortcut to the which should be the last item in the bar unless you've modified the contents. expression,

9. Right-click on the item and choose the Properties command from the context menu that appears. In the Expression Properties dialog that opens you'll see the same keyboard shortcut items we saw in the Customize Keyboard dialog. 10. Enter the shortcut Alt+R for this expression and close the dialog. 11. Type Alt+R, and will be inserted into the equation window.

We could have assigned a shortcut for this expression using the Customize Keyboard dialog, but locating the command would have involved clicking on Toolbar Commands, Tabs, Tab 1, Small Bar, Expression 14. Right-clicking directly on the expression is a lot faster!

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working with TeX, LaTeX & MathML


This tutorial teaches you how to convert MathType equations into textual markup languages, such as TeX, LaTeX, and MathML. Our main focus will be on LaTeX, but techniques for other languages are very similar. In creating your LaTeX document, we assume you will be running MathType at the same time as your usual TeX system. Suppose you want to create the following paragraph in your LaTeX document:

The steps are as follows: 1. Type In the quadratic formula in your text editor. 2. Run MathType by choosing it from your Start menu. 3. From MathType's Preferences menu, choose Translators. In the dialog that appears, set the options as shown below, and then choose OK.

4. Create the quadratic formula in MathType. 5. From MathType's Edit menu, choose Select All and then Copy. 6. Switch back to your text editor, and choose Paste. This will insert the following text into your document: \[ x = \frac{{ - b\pm \sqrt {b^{2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}} \] If you are familiar with LaTeX , you will recognize this as the LaTeX source code for the quadratic formula. 7. Continue typing the discriminant, and then switch back to MathType. 8. Create the discriminant term .

9. In MathType's Format menu, choose Inline Equation. This makes MathType generate the appropriate LaTeX code for an inline equation. 10. Copy the equation and paste it into your text document, and then type is the most important term . Your document should now look something like this In the quadratic formula \[ x = \frac{{ - b\pm \sqrt {b^{2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}} \] the discriminant $ {b^{2} - 4ac} $ is the most important term. Translator Options Converting Equations

If you want MathType's Convert Equations command in Word to work with your equations, you must turn on the "Include MathType data in translation" and "Include translator name in translation" options. In many situations it is useful to be able to transfer old equations from a TeX document back into MathType for editing or re-use. This is possible, provided the equations were originally created in MathType with suitable translator options set. To understand the approach, choose Translators from MathType's Preferences menu, and check the box labeled "Include MathType data in translation". Now create the quadratic formula again and Copy and Paste it into your text document. This time, the resulting text will be % MathType!MTEF!2!1!+% feaaeaart1ev0aaakeaacaWG4bGaeyypa0ZaaSaaaeaacqGHsislca % WGIbGaeyySae7aaOaaaeaacaWGIbWaaWbaaSqabeaacaaIYaaaaOGa % eyOeI0IaaGinaiaadggacaWGJbaaleqaaaGcbaGaaGOmaiaadggaaa % aaaa!0E70! \[ x = \frac{{ - b\pm \sqrt {b^{2} - 4ac} }}{{2a}} \] The first five lines of text (the ones starting with a % sign) are a TeX comment containing MathType's own private representation of your equation. You must select this comment when you paste it back into MathType so it will be converted back into a normal MathType equation. If you omit the comment, or change it in any way, the transfer back to MathType will not work. TeX comments are ignored during the typesetting process, so they will have no effect on your final output. MathType's Translators dialog also provides the "Include translator name in translation" option, which helps to delineate and identify equations in your documents. This might be useful if you want to write programs that search your TeX source files looking for equations and processing them in some way. Other Translators MathType includes translators for several dialects of TeX (Plain TeX, AMS-TeX, LaTeX, and AMS-LaTeX). These dialects correspond to various packages of TeX macros, which you must load before you typeset your document. For example, to typeset AMS-LaTeX code, you must include the commands \documentclass{amsart} or \usepackage{amsmath}, or some equivalent somewhere in the preamble of your document. Please consult your TeX or LaTeX documentation for more details. Wikipedia and many other blogs, wikis and web sites represent math in a language called Texvc, which is essentially a subset of TeX math. MathType includes a Texvc translator tuned for use with Wikipedia, and a second generic Texvc translator that works with many other sites that use TeX. Because Texvc is somewhat simpler than other TeX dialects, one of these translators is often a good choice if you will be editing the equation further by hand. MathType 6.5 also introduces a new TeX Toggle feature that allows you to toggle back and forth between Texvc and MathType views of an equation in Microsoft Word. MathType also includes translators for for using MathType with a number of other applications and web sites, including Maple, Mathematica, Physics Forum and Wikipedia. Look for these applications by name in the list of translator files. The list of available translators is constantly growing. See Using MathType with Applications and Websites for more information about obtaining new translators. MathML See www.w3.org/math for more information on MathML. We also supply translators for MathML, a markup language based on XML (eXtensible Markup Language) for encoding mathematics. As of this writing MathML 2.0 is the latest version. MathType comes with three MathML 2.0 translators that only differ in the namespace in which the MathML is placed. Which one you should pick is determined by the MathML renderer you use; either a browser plug-in (WebEQ, MathPlayer or techexplorer), or a browser with built-in MathML support (Amaya or Mozilla). A fourth MathML translator generates MathML 1.0. See MathType's online help or visit our website, www.dessci.com , for further description of our MathML translators. Creating and Modifying Translators If our standard translators do not meet your needs, you may want to modify one of them or write a new one of your own. Each translator is driven by a translation file written in our Translator Definition Language (TDL). You will find several TDL files in MathType's Translators folder, and you can edit these to suit your needs, or write completely new ones. To obtain detailed documentation on writing translators visit our website, www.dessci.com .

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Exporting Equations in Microsoft Word


In this tutorial we show you how to export all the equations in a Word document to individual graphics files. You can export them as GIF, WMF or EPS files, and you can control the location and naming of the files. You also have the option to replace each equation with the name of its corresponding file. This feature can be useful when importing Word documents into desktop publishing programs. Many don't import embedded equations very well, preferring individual equation files. The Export Equations command makes this process much easier. 1. Launch Word and create a document containing a couple of equations. 2. Choose the Export Equations command on the MathType menu (Word 2003 and earlier) or in the Publish group on the MathType tab (Word 2007). The Export Equations dialog will appear.

3. Enter a location in the Folder field. You can either type the name of a folder or click the Browse button and select a folder. If you enter the name of a folder that doesn't exist you will be asked if you want to create it. Check the "Delete all files of same type in folder" checkbox if you want all files with the same extension deleted from this folder before exporting. Be careful if you select this option; if you export as GIF files to the folder C:\My Documents then every .gif file in this folder will be deleted. It's usually safest to create a new folder for each set of exported equation files. GIF Settings You can set the resolution, background color and other attributes of GIF files in MathType's Web and GIF Preferences dialog. 4. Select the format of the exported equation files. You can also set the filename pattern and the starting number. The above example will create the files Eqn001.eps, Eqn002.eps etc. Setting the pattern to "PhysIntro###" and the first number to 50 will create the files PhysIntro050.eps, PhysIntro051.eps etc. You may want to experiment with different patterns and numbers. 5. Check the "Replace equation with file name" checkbox if you want to replace each exported equation with the corresponding file name. For example, the above settings would insert the text <<Eqn001.eps>> in place of the first exported equation. Clear this checkbox if you want to leave the equations in the document unmodified. 6. Choose the "Whole document" option if you want to export all equations in the document. The "Current selection" option is enabled only when you select a portion of the document before running the Export Equations command. 7. Click OK to start the exporting process. When the process has finished a dialog appears indicating how many equations were exported.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Simplifying Rational Expressions by Dividing Common Factors


Quite often in mathematics it's necessary to mark through a term in an expression to show borrowing in a subtraction problem, to divide out common factors in a rational expression, etc. It's a trivial matter with a pencil and paper to perform such a "strikethrough", but when writing a document in your word processor, it's a different matter. This tutorial will show how to make such annotations with MathType. We'll assume you're preparing a worksheet showing how to simplify a rational expression:

We want to show students how to divide out the common factors, so we'll use MathType's strike-through templates. 1. Create the first fraction shown above, then type = and insert the second fraction template:

2. Before typing the numerator, choose the "Strike-through (bottom-left to upper-right)" template from the "Underbar and overbar" templates palette:

3. Inside the strike-through template, type the first factor in the numerator. Press Tab to exit the strike-through template, then type the second factor:

Strike-through thickness If the strike-through line isn't distinct enough when you print or project it, you can increase its thickness. From the Format menu, choose Define Spacing. Scroll down near the bottom of the list until you find Strike-through thickness. Increase the thickness to a value that will make the strike-through more vivid. It's not necessary to click Apply before clicking OK, but doing so allows you to try out different thickness values before choosing the one you like best. 4. Repeat these steps for the denominator. Strike-throughs in color A good way to draw attention to part of an expression is to create it in a contrasting color. If you're printing your worksheet in color or inserting a strike-through into a PowerPoint presentation, choose the strike-through color before choosing the template, then choose the strike-through template. If you want the contents to be black, switch back to black before typing the contents. 5. If you want to complete the steps of the solution, press Enter when you're finished with the second fraction. Type another =, then type the final fraction in simplified form. To align the two lines at the = symbols, choose the Align at = command from the Format menu. The final problem solution should look like this:

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

What To Do Next
This concludes the last of our tutorials. We certainly haven't covered everything that MathType can do, but if all went well then you've grasped the basic principles. Using MathType with Applications and Websites contains additional information about using MathType with other applications. Creating Webpages with MathPage introduces MathType's MathPage technology, and shows how you can generate great-looking webpages from Word documents. The Style menu section covers MathType styles and advanced formatting. It's not necessary to read them immediately, but once you've progressed beyond creating simple equations you'll find them worth reading. If you get stuck, please get in touch with us our contact information is listed within Getting Help at the Design Science Website.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Comparing MathType, Equation Editor and MathType Lite Mode


In This Chapter Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType Collaborating with Equation Editor Users New Features in MathType 6.5

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode


Evaluating MathType for 30 days
If you have evaluated MathType for 30 days without purchasing and entering a product key, MathType will go into Lite Mode. You can purchase a product key from our Online Store , through email, or by calling our sales line. Once you have a valid product key, you can use the Unlock/Register MathType... command on MathType's Help menu to unlock MathType and gain permanent access to all its features -- there is no need to download or install MathType again. See Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType for more information.

If you decide not to buy


If by the end of the 30 day evaluation period you decide not to purchase a MathType product key, you can uninstall MathType. If you use Microsoft Office, or any of the many other word processors and applications that come with our Equation Editor product, you can go back to using it. However, we recommend that you not uninstall MathType, but continue to use it in its Lite Mode. This will give you the same functionality as Equation Editor but will make it easier to work with friends and colleagues that own MathType. You will be able to edit the equations in documents they create but won't be able to use any of MathType's added features. And, if you change your mind later, you can simply purchase a MathType product key and unlock MathType -- there is no need to download or install MathType again. See Also: MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Features Not Available in Lite Mode


When MathType runs in Lite Mode the following features are changed: Saving equation files and printing are disabled. Only the toolbar's symbol and template palettes can be used. MathType's additional symbols and templates in the palettes are disabled. MathType's Commands for Word are disabled. The Insert Symbol dialog is hidden. The Color menu is hidden (existing colors are still used). Preference files cannot be loaded or saved. Keyboard shortcuts cannot be defined. A big advantage of MathType in Lite Mode over Equation Editor is that it can edit all equations created by MathType. MathType in Lite Mode cannot insert all the symbols or templates that MathType can, but all of the existing symbols and templates in an equation can be edited. This makes collaboration between MathType users and non-MathType users easier than ever before. See Collaborating with Equation Editor Users for more information.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Purchasing a Product Key and Unlocking MathType


MathType running in Lite Mode can be unlocked, or upgraded to the full version of MathType, at any time. All you need to do is purchase a copy of MathType and unlock MathType using the product key that you receive. Options for Purchasing MathType Online Order MathType from our Online Store . By Email Contact us directly via email at sales@dessci.com . By Phone Call our toll-free number: +1 (800) 827-0685 (US and Canada only), +1 (562) 432-2920 (outside the US and Canada). Hours of Operation: Monday - Friday, 8am to 5pm, Pacific time (GMT-8) Unlock and Register MathType Open MathType, and choose the Unlock/Register MathType Enter the requested information into the dialog. In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing, register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box that allows your information to be sent to Design Science is selected. command on the Help menu.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Collaborating with Equation Editor Users


From time to time, you may need to collaborate with other people on a document containing equations. If they possess a copy of MathType 4 or newer you should not have any problems. For full compatibility they should use MathType 6, particularly if you're using some of its new equation numbering features. Many people have a copy of our Equation Editor, either from Microsoft Word or from another product (Corel WordPerfect, etc.). For various reasons it's not possible to provide full compatibility between these versions of Equation Editor and MathType. However, there is a way of using MathType 6 that provides a better solution. MathType can be downloaded from the MathType website for a 30-day trial. This is the full version, and for 30 days you or a collaborator can use it free of charge. Its functionality is not limited in any way. After the trial period has ended, MathType runs in what we call Lite mode. This provides similar functionality to Equation Editor. However, with MathType Lite you or a collaborator can edit all equations created with MathType 6, making it the ideal tool for people who need to collaborate with you on technical documents. Of course it's nowhere near as convenient to use as MathType, but for occasional collaboration it's a practical solution. MathType Lite can also be upgraded at any time to the full version of MathType 6, without having to re-install. See Using MathType Lite and Equation Editor. If you are collaborating with an Equation Editor user, you can turn off the option in MathType's Object Editing Preferences Dialog so that Equation Editor will be used instead of MathType for editing existing Equation Editor equations..

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

New Features in MathType 6.5


MathType 6.5 for Windows new features: Convert Microsoft Word 2007 (OMML) equations to MathType equations using Convert Equations in Word 2007 and Word 2003. Type TeX directly into Word 2007 or Word 2003, and toggle between TeX and MathType views of the equation with TeX Toggle. New Translators for Maple, Mathematica, Physics Forum LaTeX and more. See Using MathType with Applications and Websites for details. New keyboard shortcuts in Word 2007 and Word 2003 for opening equations for editing in MathType. MathML Copy and Paste into MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using MathType
In This Chapter Working with the Toolbar Working with the Keyboard Working with Files Working with Insert Symbol Using Fonts Other Topics

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working with the Toolbar


In This Chapter Adding Expressions to the Bars Editing Expressions in the Bars Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items Removing Items from the Bars Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Adding Expressions to the Bars


To add all or any part of an equation you are working on to the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps: 1. Select the part of the equation you want to add to a bar or choose Select All from the Edit Menu. 2. Position the mouse pointer over the selection. 3. Press and hold the mouse button. A small dotted rectangle should appear next to the mouse pointer indicating you are dragging the expression. 4. Move the mouse pointer over the bar you want to add the expression to and release the mouse button. See Also Toolbar Overview Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the bars Removing items from the bars

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Editing Expressions in the Bars


To edit an expression that you have already added to the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, just rightclick on the expression and choose Edit. This will open the expression in an equation window, allowing you to edit the expression. Once you have made changes, just close the window. The expression will be updated in the toolbar. You can also right-click on the item and choose Properties from the menu to bring up the Expression Properties Dialog, then click the Edit expression... button. Hint: You can double-click on the item, and it will be opened in a separate window for editing. See Also Toolbar Overview

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items


To change the status bar description for an expression in the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, just right-click on the expression and choose Properties from the menu. This will bring up the Expression Properties Dialog which allows you to change the description. See Also Toolbar Overview

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Removing Items from the Bars


To remove an item from either the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the Alt key. 2. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the item to be removed. 3. Press and hold the mouse button. A small dotted rectangle should appear next to the mouse pointer to indicate you are dragging the symbol or template. You can release the Alt key at this point. 4. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer outside the toolbar and the equation window until the mouse pointer appears as a circle with a diagonal slash, then release the mouse button. Hint: You can also right-click on the item and choose Delete from the menu. See Also Toolbar Overview Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the bars Adding expressions to the bars

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars
To add a symbol or template from the palettes to either the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps: 1. Click once in the palette button to open it. 2. Find the desired symbol or template in the palette. 3. Press and hold the Alt key. 4. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the symbol or template. 5. Press and hold the mouse button. You can release the Alt key at this point. A small dotted rectangle should appear next to the mouse pointer indicating you are dragging the item. A symbol will appear when you are over an area that is not a valid area to add the template or symbol. 6. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer over the bar that you want to add the item to and release the mouse button. As you move over a Tab, the toolbar will update to display that tab's contents, to help you find where you want to add the button. See Also Toolbar Overview Removing items from the bars Symbol palettes Template palettes

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars
To add a symbol from the Insert Symbol Dialog's symbol grid to the Small Bar, the Large Tabbed Bar, or the Small Tabbed Bar, follow these steps: 1. Select the desired symbol or character in the grid. 2. Press and hold the Alt key. 3. While holding the Alt key, position the mouse arrow over the symbol. 4. Press and hold the mouse button. You can release the Alt key at this point. 5. While continuing to press the mouse button, move the pointer over the bar that you want to add the item to and release the mouse button. As you move over a Tab, the toolbar will update to display that tab's contents, to help you find where you want to add the button. See Also Toolbar Overview Removing Items from the Bars

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working with the Keyboard


In This Chapter Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression One-shot style shortcuts Using TeX Language Input

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts


You can review, assign, or remove Keyboard Shortcuts in several dialogs: Insert Symbol Dialog (on the Edit menu) Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove keyboard shortcuts associated with the currently selected symbol in the grid. Expression Properties Dialog (right-click on a toolbar cell and choose Properties) Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove keyboard shortcuts associated with the selected toolbar expression. Customize Keyboard Dialog (on the Preferences menu) Use this dialog to review, assign, or remove all keyboard shortcuts. However, you must use the Insert Symbol Dialog to assign new keyboard shortcuts to characters in fonts. The keyboard shortcut section at the bottom of each of these dialogs contains the same items and they work the same way in each: Enter new shortcut key(s) Enter keystrokes here to assign a new keyboard shortcut . Use backspace or Delete to delete a keystroke. Once you have entered the desired keys, click Assign to assign the keystroke(s) to the command. When the insertion point is in this item, you will not be able to use the normal keystrokes such as Tab to navigate around in the dialog. Press Esc to get out of this item. Assigned to Once you have entered some keystrokes, this item shows you to which command (if any) the keystrokes are currently assigned. Use this item to prevent accidentally removing an assignment you want to keep. Current keys This shows the keystroke shortcut(s) currently assigned to the command. Select a shortcut in this list and click Remove to delete a shortcut. Assign Once you have entered new keystrokes, this button can be used to assign them to the command. Once you have done this, the new keystroke shortcut will be displayed in the Current keys list. Remove Once you have selected an existing keyboard shortcut in the Current keys list, click this button to delete it.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression


To add a keyboard shortcut for an expression in the toolbar, right-click on it and choose Properties to bring up the Expression Properties Dialog, then enter or change the keyboard shortcut assigned to the expression. See Also Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

One-shot style shortcuts


One-shot style commands allow you to quickly enter a character into an equation without changing the current style . If you type the shortcut assigned to one of these commands, the style associated with the command will be used on the next character you type. There are four one-shot style commands: Greek- Symbol Ctrl+G This will assign the L.C. Greek or the U.C. Greek style if you type a letter, or the Symbol style if you type anything else. User 1 Ctrl+U This will assign the User 1 style to the next character you type. User 2 Alt+Ctrl+U This will assign the User 2 style to the next character you type. Vector-Matrix Ctrl+B This will assign the Vector- Matrix style to the next character you type. The shortcuts shown here are MathType's defaults. You can assign different shortcuts using the Customize Keyboard Dialog under the Style for Next Typed Character category.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using TeX Language Input


MathType allows keyboard input of a subset of TeX supported by Wikipedia. See the help topic Displaying a formula MediaWiki handbook for an explanation of this language. in the To use this feature, you need to enable the Allow TeX language entry from the keyboard option in the Workspace Preferences Dialog in the MathType Preferences menu. Entering Equations Equations typed using TeX in MathType must begin with the characters $, \, ^, or _. This switches the editor to an input mode, which changes the text color to grey. Once you have completed entering an equation, exit input mode by pressing Enter on the keyboard. MathType will then convert the TeX to a MathType equation. For example, entering the following equation in TeX,

will result in this MathType equation.

Errors MathType will attempt to parse as much of the input as it can, and show the errors it encounters in red. To correct errors, choose Undo from the edit menu, or Ctrl-Z, to return to input mode. Copy/Pasting TeX can be pasted into MathType whether or not the Allow TeX language entry from the keyboard option has been enabled. This is useful when pasting equations copied from Wikipedia. See Also Typing TeX Directly Into Word 2007 (TeX Toggle) Typing TeX Directly Into Word Pre-2007 (TeX Toggle) Using MathType with Wikipedia Working With TeX

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working with Files


In This Chapter EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) WMF (Windows Metafiles) TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)


EPS is a file format used for graphics in desktop publishing applications like Adobe PageMaker and Quark XPress.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)


GIF is a graphics file format generally used for line art (as opposed to JPEG which is best for photographs) in Internet publishing applications. Save equations in this format when creating webpages. See also Save As Dialog and Web and GIF Preferences Dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

WMF (Windows Metafiles)


This is the standard graphics file format for the Microsoft Windows family of operating systems. Although the metafile format can accommodate bitmap images, the metafiles created by MathType are "draw"-style graphics and, therefore, are scalable and will print at full resolution. Use this format to import equations into drawing applications.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)


TIFF is a graphics file format originally created to be used with PostScript printing, but is also popular for use with high color depth images.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working with Insert Symbol


In This Chapter Inserting a specific character or symbol Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in its Description

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Inserting a specific character or symbol


Place the insertion point where you want the new character to be inserted. Then insert the character by one of the following two methods: Method 1: Using the Symbol Palettes: 1. Use the mouse or the keyboard to find the desired symbol in the symbol palettes. 2. Click on the symbol in the palette. Method 2: Using the Insert Symbol Dialog: 1. Choose Insert Symbol from the Edit menu. 2. Find the character or symbol desired. 3. Double-click on the character or symbol (or select it and click Insert).

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in its Description


To find a character or symbol by matching words in its Character Description , perform the following steps: 1. Choose Insert Symbol from the Edit Menu to bring up the Insert Symbol Dialog 2. Choose Description from the View by menu 3. Click the New search button to bring up the Insert Symbol Search Dialog 4. Enter words and/or phrases that might be in the description 5. Click OK to get back to the Insert Symbol Dialog 6. Look among the matching symbols in the grid for your symbol

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using Fonts
In This Chapter Styles Blackboard bold (double-stroked) Fraktur (Old German) Letting Other People View and Print your Documents Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Styles
Each character in a MathType equation is either directly assigned a specific font and character style , or is assigned one of eleven styles. MathType's styles are somewhat analogous to text styles in word processing and page layout applications. Each one is defined as a combination of a font and character style (e.g., Times/bold/italic or Symbol/bold). Styles save you from having to worry about fonts and character styles separately, and hence speed up your work and help you maintain consistency in your equations. Also, by changing the definition of a style, you can quickly change the appearance of all the characters that use it. The styles available in MathType are Text, Function, Variable, Lower-case Greek, Upper-case Greek, Symbol, Vector-Matrix, Number,and Extra Math. MathType also has User 1 and User 2 styles. MathType will assign certain styles to certain kinds of characters automatically, based on its knowledge of mathematics and typesetting conventions. This intelligent assignment of styles is a unique feature of MathType which significantly increases your productivity and reduces typographical errors.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Blackboard bold (double-stroked)


This is a style of font often used in mathematics to represent sets. For example: N for the set of natural numbers, and R for the reals. MathType's Euclid Math Two font contains the commonly used blackboard bold characters. Suggestion: Assign the Euclid Math Two font to the User 1 (or User 2) style using the Define Styles dialog. From then on, whenever you want to enter a blackboard bold character, type Ctrl+Shift+U (or Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U for User 2) followed by that character.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Fraktur (Old German)


This is a style of font often used in mathematics. MathType's Euclid Fraktur font contains the full Fraktur alphabet (e.g., A, I, a, b). Suggestion: Assign the Euclid Fraktur font to the User 1 (or User 2) style using the Define Styles dialog. From then on, whenever you want to enter a Fraktur character, type Ctrl+U (or Ctrl+Alt+U for User 2) followed by that character.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Letting Other People View and Print your Documents


If you give someone a document that contains MathType or Equation Editor equations, they will need to install all fonts used by the document and its equations in order to properly view and print the document. The same also goes for individual equation files, except for GIF files which are bitmaps and therefore do not require fonts. You can send the fonts to your associate along with the document. This can be done with the MathType fonts. However, this may violate your license agreement for the other fonts. If the document is a Microsoft Word document, you can make use of its font embedding feature to attach the fonts to the document. This is available as an option in Word's Save As dialog. Other applications may have a similar font embedding feature.

MathType's Font Installers


In order to make it easy to distribute MathType's fonts to other people that need to view or print your documents and to streamline the font installation process, we have two font installer programs available to you: one for TrueType fonts and one for PostScript fonts. If you purchased MathType in CD-ROM form, these font installers are located in the MathType \Fonts folder on the CD. If you purchased MathType electronically, the same font installers are available on the support section of our website . You are free to distribute these font installers to anyone as long as you follow our Font License Agreement. If possible, refer people that want to view or print your documents to the Design Science website to download the font installers, rather than sending them in email or on disk. This will ensure that they get the latest versions. Remember, if your document or its equations use other fonts besides MathType's, these must also be installed in order to print or view them.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Adding to MathType's Font and Character Knowledge


MathType has a database of characters that it uses to make decisions like: How much space will be inserted around the character Which of MathType's styles should be assigned to it How will it be translated to TeX, MathML, etc What description will be shown in the Status Bar and in the Insert Symbol Dialog MathType also contains information on what characters are present in the fonts installed on your computer, both MathType's own fonts and any other fonts you might have. Although MathType has knowledge of many of the mathematical characters and fonts that are in common use, it can't possibly know them all as there are literally thousands of fonts in existence. We at Design Science expect to continually add to MathType's font and character database with new releases. If you want to add information for your own fonts and their characters, please contact us at support@dessci.com for more information. You can also add information to MathType's font and character knowledge yourself by modifying the file fontinfo.ini which is located in the Fonts folder inside the MathType folder. See the contents of fontinfo.ini for instructions. For more information, visit the support section of our website .

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Other Topics
In This Chapter Drag & Drop Replacing one Template with Another Status Bar Checking For the Latest Version OLE's Insert Object Command

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Drag & Drop


Any selected part of an equation may be moved or copied to the toolbar or some other place in the equation by using the dragand-drop technique: 1. Select the part of the equation you want to move or copy. 2. Click on the selection with the mouse and hold the mouse button down. 3. While continuing to hold the mouse button down, move the mouse pointer over the place you want to move or copy to. 4. When the mouse pointer is in the desired position, release the button to complete the operation. 5. Normally, the selected part of the equation will be moved to the new location but, if you hold the Ctrl key down while dragging, it will be copied, leaving the original material intact. Similarly, you can move or copy a toolbar item within the toolbar by holding the Alt key down while clicking in it, and then simply dragging it to another place on the toolbar.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Replacing one Template with Another


Sometimes it is necessary to replace one template in your equation with another after you have already filled the templates slots. To avoid having to do a lot of cutting and pasting or re-entering of the expressions, you can replace the original template by another different one from the toolbar. Follow these steps: 1. Select the template and its contents to be replaced. Be careful not to select adjacent characters or templates. 2. While holding the Ctrl key down, select the new template from the Template Palettes. The new template will replace the old one and the expressions in the original templates slots will be moved to the corresponding slots of the new template.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Status Bar
The Status Bar is displayed along the bottom edge of every equation window. It contains twofour areas that show the settings that will be used for material you subsequently type: Style This area shows which of MathType's styles will be assigned to characters you enter. Normally, this is Math which means MathType will automatically assign styles based on which characters you type: the Function style for functions, the Variable style for variables, and so on. You can cause characters you type to have a specific style or font by choosing commands from the Style menu. As a shortcut, you can also right-click in this status bar area to choose from the same menu. Size This area shows which of MathType's typesizes will be assigned to characters you enter. Normally, MathType will automatically assign sizes based on the position of the slot containing the insertion point or selection; Subscript size in a subscript or limit, for example. You can cause characters you type to have a specific size by choosing commands from the Size menu. As a shortcut, you can also right-click in this area to choose a new size. Zoom This area shows the current viewing scale for the window. This can be changed by choosing commands from the Zoom sub-menu on the View menu or by double-clicking in this area to bring up the Zoom dialog. You can also right-click in this area to choose a new zoom scale. Color This area shows which color will be assigned to characters you enter. To change this color, choose commands from the Color sub-menu on the Format menu or double-click on this area to bring up the Color dialog. As a shortcut, you can also right-click in this area to choose a color. Hint: you can double-click on any of the areas on the status bar to display the relevant dialog, or right-click to display the appropriate menu.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Checking For the Latest Version


MathType supports both automatic and manual checking to find out if a newer version of MathType is available. The checks access the latest MathType version information via your Internet connection. After checking the version, a dialog will be displayed letting you know the results of the comparison. MathType will normally perform this check once a month. If you want to check more often, manually choose the Check for Latest Version Now command on the same menu whenever you want to check for a newer version. If there isn't a newer version of MathType available, the version check may occasionally display information about other Design Science products that have been released. If you'd prefer not to see these, either click the Don't show me this again checkbox in the message, or uncheck the Show Tips command on the MathType on the Web sub-menu of the Help menu.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

OLE's Insert Object Command


Most OLE -compatible applications have an Insert Object command. This is usually the Object command on the Insert menu, but may be available in other ways (e.g., a toolbar button, a different menu item, etc.). If you have trouble finding an application's Insert Object command, look up "OLE" in its documentation. This command allows you to insert any kind of object for which you have software installed on your computer, including equations. The Insert Object command will bring up a list of all the objects you can insert. To insert an equation, select MathType 6.0 Equation.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType with Microsoft Office


In This Chapter Office 2007 Office 2000, 2002 and 2003

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Office 2007
In This Chapter MathType's Support for Microsoft Word MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType's Support for Microsoft Word


In This Chapter Support for Microsoft Word MathType Tab in Microsoft Word Inserting MathType Equations Numbering Equations Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks Using Equation Preferences Format Equations Format Equations Step-by-Step Converting Equations Converting Equations Step-by-Step Exporting Equations Exporting Equations Step-by-Step Creating Web Pages with MathPage Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step Publishing to MathPage using MathML Typing TeX Directly Into Word 2007 (TeX Toggle) Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Support for Microsoft Word


MathType adds several commands to Microsoft Word that you will find useful when creating and working with documents containing equations. You will find these commands on the MathType Tab on Word's Ribbon. Here are some of the tasks you can perform: Insert equations into your document. There are separate commands for inserting inline equations , display equations , and left- or right-numbered display equations. See Inserting MathType Equations, Left-Numbered Display Equation, and RightNumbered Display Equation. Set the equation preferences to be used for new equations in the document. See Using Equation Preferences. Convert documents into Web pages using the Publish to MathPage command. See Publish to MathPage Dialog. Export equations in a Word document to individual graphics files with the Export Equations command. See Export Equations Dialog. Change the format of equations in the current selection or the entire document. See Format Equations. Add equation numbers and references that will automatically be renumbered after editing. See Numbering Equations. Convert Equation Editor equations to MathType equations. See Converting Equations. Convert equations to TeX, MathML, or any other language for which we have a translator. Browse by Equations, Equation Numbers, and Chapter/Section Breaks See Translators. The MathType Setup application automatically installs MathType's support for Word, for each version of Word it detects on your computer. However, if you install a new version of Word after you install MathType, the commands will not be available for the new version of Word. In this case just re-install MathType. If you want to remove the MathType commands temporarily from Word, click the Microsoft Office Button, click Word Options, and then click Add-ins. In the Manage box, click Templates, and then click Go. Uncheck the box next to the MathType Commands item. To remove them permanently, quit Word and remove the MathType 6 Commands for Word file from Word's startup folder. See Also MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Tab in Microsoft Word


In This Chapter Insert Equations Group Symbols Group Equation Numbers Group Browse Group Format Group Publish Group Help Group

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Equations Group

Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation. If you have defined equation preferences for new equations (using the Set Equation Preferences command), these settings will be used in the MathType window. Otherwise MathType's current preferences for new equations will be used. The resulting equation is inserted inline, i.e., aligned with the surrounding text. Insert Display Equation Alt+Q Opens a new MathType window using equation preferences as described above under Insert Inline Equation. The display equation is inserted on a new line and centered between the left and right margins. To simplify changing the formatting for all of the display equations in a document, a Word style called MTDisplayEquation is created that defines the position of the center tab stop. This means that you can change the alignment of all of the display equations in a document by simply modifying this style. Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a right-aligned equation number following the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the right margin tab stop. Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a left-aligned equation number before the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the center tab stop. See Also Inserting MathType Equations

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Symbols Group

The controls in the symbols group contain common mathematical symbols as well as many other symbols and characters for use in the document. For more information about inserting symbols in Word, open Word's help by hovering over Other in the Symbols Group and pressing the F1 key. Note: While you can create inline equations in MathType consisting of a single symbol, we recommend you insert symbols from the Symbol Group on the MathType tab instead. Equations have more overhead in the document, and for large documents the difference can be significant.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Equation Numbers Group

Insert Number Insert Number Inserts an equation number at the insertion point. The default format includes a section number and an equation number. The equation number increments each time you insert a number. You can define the section number using Insert Break... under Chapters & Sections. Use Format... to set or change the number format. Format... Opens the Format Equation Numbers Dialog, which allows you to change the format of new and/or existing equation numbers. You can also turn off automatic updating of equation numbers and references in this dialog. Update Updates all equation numbers and equation references in the document, including those in footnotes and endnotes. You need to use this command if you turn off automatic updating in the Format Equation Numbers Dialog, or if you move or delete any equation numbers in your document. Insert Reference Inserts a reference to an existing equation number. It inserts a copy of the referenced equation number at the insertion point. In addition, if you double-click on a reference your document will scroll to the referenced equation. When equation numbers are updated, equation references will be updated as well. Place the insertion point at the place where you wish to insert the reference, and click this button (the Insert Equation Reference Dialog will appear). Next, double-click on the equation number you want to reference (you may have to scroll the document to find the equation). Chapters & Sections Insert Next Section Break Inserts a section break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the previous section break. Insert Next Chapter Break Inserts a chapter break and numbers it by incrementing the number of the previous chapter break. Insert Break... Opens the Insert Equation Section Break Dialog, which allows you to insert an equation section break. Equation sections define the section number used in equation numbers. Modify Break... Opens the Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog, which allows you to locate and modify the current chapter/section break (the one preceding the current position of the insertion point).

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Browse Group

The Browse group allows you to browse up or down through the document stopping at Equations, Equation Numbers or Chapter/Section Breaks. See Also Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Group

Equation Preferences This command opens the Set Equation Preferences Dialog, which allows you to specify the equation preferences to be used for new equations you insert into the document. Format Equations Opens the Format Equations Dialog, which allows you to change the format of the equations in the current selection or the entire document. Convert Equations Opens the Convert Equations Dialog, which allows you to convert equations in your document to a format you specify (including TeX or MathML). See Also Format Equations Converting Equations

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Publish Group

Export Equations Opens the Export Equations Dialog, which allows you to export the equations in your document into individual graphics files. Publish to MathPage Opens the Export to MathPage Dialog, which allows you to export the document as a Web page including MathPage technology to handle the equations. See Also Exporting Equations Creating Web Pages with MathPage

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Help Group

MathType Help Contents and Index... Opens MathType Help Using MathType in Word... Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word Unlock/Register MathType... Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing. About MathType... Displays MathType's About box showing you: The version of the MathType application you are currently using Copyright information Your product registration information, including your product key if you have unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in evaluation mode MathType on the Web MathType Home Page... Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English). Online Support... Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and information on compatibility with other applications. Send Feedback by Email... Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report, please visit our online tech support area first. Order MathType... Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products). Future MathType Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Inserting MathType Equations


The MathType commands for Word provide five methods for inserting MathType equations into Word documents. These are: Inserting an inline equation Inserting a display equation Inserting a right-numbered display equation Inserting a left-numbered display equation We recommend that you always use one of these commands to insert equations as they work properly with the Using Equation Preferences commands that help ensure consistency between the equations in your documents. The Insert Inline Equation command inserts a MathType equation at the insertion point. The equation is adjusted to align itself with the surrounding text, so use this command when you want to insert an equation in a sentence. Note: While you can create inline equations consisting of a single symbol, we recommend you use Word's Insert Symbol command instead. Equations have more overhead in the document, and for large documents the difference can be significant. The Insert Display Equation and Insert Left/Right-Numbered Display Equation commands are very similar. All insert a new line if the insertion point isn't already on a new line, and then insert an equation centered between the left and right margins. The Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation command inserts a right-justified equation number following the equation, while the Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation command inserts a left-aligned equation number before the equation. A Word style named MTDisplayEquation is added to the Word document the first time you use any of these three commands. This style defines the center tab and the right tab positions. Its other formatting is based on the style in use at the time it's created. You can change the alignment of all the display equations in a document by modifying this style using the Style command on Word's Format menu. This style is created separately for each document into which you insert a display equation. The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type TeX or LaTeX directly into a Word document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the command again will return the MathType equations to TeX. When typing TeX, using either the $...$ or \(...\) delimiters results in a MathType Inline Equation after applying the toggle, and using either the $$...$$ or \[...\] delimiters results in a MathType Display Equation after the toggle. To use the toggle with a single equation, click the Toggle MathType/TeX icon (in the Publish group of the Ribbon's MathType tab) and the equation nearest the insertion point will be converted to a MathType equation. To convert the entire document, select the document contents (Ctrl+A); to convert part of it, select the part you want to convert. Click the toggle. To convert the equations back, repeat the procedure.

Inserting and Opening Equations Using Keyboard Shortcuts


MathType equations can be inserted in a Microsoft Word document using keyboard shortcuts. The equation will be inserted at the current cursor location in the document. There are shortcuts for each type of MathType equation. Insert display equation (Alt+Q) Insert inline equation (Crtl+Alt+Q) Insert right-numbered equation (Alt+Shift+Q) Insert left-numbered equation (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q) There are also keyboard shortcuts for opening an existing equation in MathType for editing. Select the equation to be edited, and use the following: Edit equation in place in the document (Alt+E) Open equation for editing in a separate MathType window (Alt+O)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Numbering Equations
The equation numbering commands allow you to insert equation numbers in a Word document in a variety of formats. You can also insert references to these numbers. Both numbers and references are automatically updated whenever you add new equation numbers to the document. Equation references can also be placed in footnotes and endnotes. The equation numbers are quite separate from equations in a Word document. If you delete an equation its equation number (if any) is not automatically deleted. Similarly, an equation reference is actually a reference to an equation number, rather than a reference to the equation itself. The format of equation numbers in a document is defined using the Format Equation Number Dialog. Equation numbers are comprised of a chapter number, a section number, a separator, an equation number and an enclosure. This allows numbers such as (1.1.1), [I.i] or {A.a}. The chapter number, section number, separator and enclosure are all optional, so you can create equation numbers such as (1.1), 1.1, or just 1 or a. If you are using the chapter and/or section numbers, you must insert a chapter/section break before the first number to define the chapter/section values. A break can have an explicit value or be set to increment by one the value of the preceding equation section. As you edit a document, equation numbers or references may get out of sequence (e.g., you move sections around). Use the Update Equation Numbers command in the toolbar and the MathType menu to update the sequence. If you select a region of your document, only this region will be updated, which can be useful with very large documents where updating can take a relatively long time. Note for users of previous versions of MathType The equation numbering in MathType 5 and later is more sophisticated than in previous versions of MathType. It is fully compatible with older documents; they'll display properly and you can insert equation numbers and references. If you modify the number format with the MathType 5 or later command, however, a MathType 4 user will not be able to insert equation numbers using the new format. The document will still display and print properly. See Also Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step by Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step


To insert equation numbers and references in a Word document, follow these steps. 1. Define the desired number format for this document using the Format Equation Numbers command. You can change this format at any time, for either all existing equation numbers, just the selected equation numbers or for new equation numbers. 2. Create a chapter/section break using the Insert Chapter/Section Break command. You should insert this in the document ahead of the first equation number you plan to add. The breaks are inserted as hidden text so that they won't normally appear. 3. Place the insertion point at the desired location and use the Insert Equation Number command to insert an equation number. 4. To insert a reference to this equation number, place the insertion point in the desired location for the reference and choose the Insert Equation Reference command. Then, double-click on the equation number to be referenced, and the reference will be inserted at the original location. 5. To modify the chapter and/or section values of a break, use the Modify Chapter/Section Break command. The closest preceding chapter/section break will be made visible and selected, and in the dialog that appears you can modify or delete the break. 6. To view all chapter/section breaks, click the Show/Hide button in Word. To hide them, click this button again (you don't need to hide them when printing, as they won't appear in the printed output). When equation section breaks are shown, a quick way to open the Modify Chapter/Section Break dialog is to double-click on a break. 7. If you insert equation numbers out of sequence, the existing numbers and references will be automatically updated. If you copy, move or delete an equation number or reference, however, you must use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the sequence. 8. The equation number updating that occurs after you insert an equation number is usually very fast. However, you may find this updating takes a while if you are working on a slower computer or on a large document containing many equation numbers and references. The Format Equation Number Dialog contains an option to turn off automatic updating. After you've finished entering equation numbers, be sure to use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the numbering sequence. Note: Update Equation Numbers works on selected text, or the whole document if there's no selection. For large documents it may be faster to select and update just the section of the document that requires it. But if you've made lots of changes, it's safest to update the entire document. Note: If you have not set your Chapter/Section breaks first time you insert an equation number or a numbered equation, the Insert Equation Number Dialog appears, which allows you to set the chapter/number breaks.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Browsing by Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter/Section Breaks


The MathType browse controls allow you to search through your documents for three types of objects: Equations Traverses all equations. Equation Numbers Steps though all the Equation Numbers created by MathType. Chapter/Section breaks Helps find the normally invisible Chapter/Section breaks. The current chapter/section break will appear in red until you click the Previous or Next buttons, or elsewhere in the document. To start the search, select the object to search for and click the Next or Previous buttons. The browse feature will search all visible parts of the document starting at cursor position. This includes headers and footers, if visible.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using Equation Preferences


When you create a document containing equations, you typically want all of the equations to use the same fonts, sizes and spacing so that they look consistent throughout the document. We recommend that you save these equation settings in a MathType preference file so that you can reload them into MathType if you need to create new equations in this particular document again. (MathType equations contain the preferences they were created with, and these preferences are used when the equation is edited in MathType). However, you may be working on several different documents that each use different equation preferences. In this situation it can be awkward to keep loading preference files, and even to remember which preference file is associated with each Word document. The Equation Preferences command allows you to save equation preferences inside your Word document. Whenever you insert a new equation in this document these preferences will be used for the new equation instead of MathType's current preference settings for new equations. This allows you to create equations that look similar without having to remember which preference file you originally used. Also, if you send the Word document to another MathType user any equations they insert will also use the correct equation preferences. To save equation preferences in a document, follow these steps: 1. In MathType, set your desired preferences using the Define Styles, Define Sizes, and Define Spacing dialogs. 2. Save these preferences as a MathType preference file using the Save Preferences Dialog. 3. In Word, open the document and choose the Set Equation Preferences command on the MathType Menu or Equation Preferences on the Mathtype Tab. 4. In the Set Equation Preferences Dialog choose the This document's equation preferences option, click the Load from MathType preference file button and select the file you just saved. 5. You can view the preferences by clicking the Preview button. Click OK and the contents of the file will be copied into the Word document (for the curious, they are saved as a custom document property).

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Equations
This command allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word EQ field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences (styles, sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document. Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range that omits them. See Also Format Equations Step-by-Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Equations Step-by-Step


To re-format the equations in a Word document, follow these steps: 1. Save a copy of your Word document. (This is always a good idea.) 2. Select the equations you want to re-format, or make no selection to re-format the whole document. 3. Choose or click Format Equations to open the Format Equations dialog. 4. Select the equation preferences you want to use for the equations. If you've set up preferences for this document with the Set Equation Preferences command, the Current document option will be enabled. If you've copied an equation to the clipboard before running this command, Equation on clipboard will be enabled. You can also use the preferences MathType is currently using for new equations, or you can pick an existing MathType equation preferences file. You can see the details of the selected preferences by clicking the Preview button, which opens the Preview Preferences Dialog. 5. Check the Use for new equations checkbox to use the selected preferences for new equations inserted into this document. This is equivalent to using the Set Equation Preferences command as well (if you've chosen the Current document option, then this is redundant). 6. Click OK and the formatting process will start. Word's status bar displays a count of the number of equations processed, and when the process has completed a dialog will display a summary. See Also Format Equations Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Converting Equations
The Convert Equations command enables you to convert equations in a Word document into a variety of formats. You can choose to convert MathType and Equation Editor equations, Word EQ formulas, Word 2007 (OMML) equation images, and MathType translated text equations into MathType 6 equations or text equations. OMML (Office Math Markup Language) equation images are created when a document is created in Word 2007, the document includes equations created with the OMML equation editor, and the document is subsequently saved in Compatibility Mode (i.e., as a doc file). MathType text equations are equations translated into a text representation using MathType's Working With TeX or Working With MathML. These equations can be converted back into MathType equations, or translated into yet another text equation, provided that both the translator name and the MathType data are preserved within the equation. If just the MathType data is preserved, the text can be pasted into a MathType window. You should always use this command when opening a document that has been authored or modified on another platform i.e., Macintosh. Although Word does a good job of converting graphics, equations many not display correctly, and font differences between the platforms inevitably cause display problems as well. Running this command converts and reformats the equations, solving these problems. You should also use this command after opening a document containing OMML equation images. See Also Converting Equations Step-by-Step Obtaining OMML to MathML Conversion Stylesheets

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Converting Equations Step-by-Step


To convert equations in a Word document, follow these steps: 1. Save a copy of your Word document just in case you don't like the results; a conversion of many equations is not easy to undo. 2. Select the equations you wish to convert, or make no selection to scan the entire document. 3. Use the Convert Equations command to open the Convert Equations Dialog. 4. Select the equation types to convert from, and to convert to. If necessary, select the desired translator. If using a translator, turn on the Include translator name as comment and Include MathType data as comment options if you might want to convert these equations again. 5. Select the Prompt before converting each equation option if you want to choose which equations to convert and which to skip. Click OK and the conversion process will begin. Feedback about the progress of the command is displayed in Word's status bar. When the command has finished a dialog displays the number of equations converted.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Exporting Equations
The Export Equations command allows you to export MathType and Equation Editor equations in your Word document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word document into a desktop publishing application. One file will be created for each equation in the document. You can choose the format of the files: EPS, Windows Metafile (WMF) or GIF . The files are numbered sequentially, starting with any number you choose, and you can define the underlying pattern, e.g., Physics001.eps, Physics002.eps, etc. You can also choose to replace each exported equation in the document with the name of its corresponding file, e.g., <<Physics001.eps>>. See Also Exporting Equations Step-by-Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step


To export equations from a Word document, follow these steps: 1. Save a copy of your Word document (this is always a good idea). 2. Select the equations you wish to export, or make no selection to export all equations in the document. 3. Use the Export Equations command to open the Export Equations Dialog. 4. Enter the name of the folder in which you want to create the exported equation files. You can either type in the name of a folder (it doesn't have to exist), or click Browse and select an existing folder. 5. Check the Delete all files of same type in folder option if you want to delete all existing files in the folder with the same extension. This can be very useful, but be careful you've chosen the correct folder! 6. Choose the export format from the list. The format determines the file extension that will be used. 7. Select a pattern for the filenames, and the starting number. The pattern must contain at least one '#' character. The # characters are replaced by a sequential number to make every filename unique. Use multiple # characters if you want the numbers to have leading zeros (this will make them display in a more natural order in sorted lists). For example, with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. The # characters don't limit the maximum number, so the above pattern can generate filenames such as Eqn1000.eps if there are this many equations in the document. 8. Check the Replace equation with file name option if you want the equations in the document replaced with the name of the corresponding file, e.g., <<Eqn001.eps>>. 9. Choose the Whole document or Current selection option based on how much of the document you want to export from, and what you did in Step 2. Click OK to start the exporting process. Word's status bar will show the progress, and once the process has completed a summary is displayed.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Creating Web Pages with MathPage


MathType's MathPage technology enables you to convert a Word document containing equations, equation numbers and equation references into a webpage. The page will look virtually the same in your browser as it does in Word. Inline equations will be correctly aligned, display equations will be properly centered, and all equations will display and print as well as from Word itself. This is true for all of the major browsers, running on Windows, Macintosh and Linux/Unix platforms. Tips for Better Webpages The following tips will help you create better webpages using MathPage. Use tables for alignment Tabs do not work well in browsers for aligning items on multiple lines. Word 97 in particular handles them quite poorly when producing a webpage. If you need a specific layout use Word's tables. Word's Convert Text To Table command on the Table menu greatly simplifies converting existing tab-aligned paragraphs to Tables. After converting to a table, select each column of the table and select Left, Right, or Center alignment to achieve the equivalent result as a Left, Right, or Center tab. Use the MathType Commands for Word to insert equations This is especially true for display equations that you want centered in a paragraph. MathPage does a good job of handling the various ways that you can center an equation and generating the correct HTML, but it works most reliably if you use MathType's Insert Display Equation and Insert Numbered Display Equation commands in Word. Use Word's Insert Symbol command for mathematical symbols This is far more efficient than creating a MathType equation containing only a few symbols, both for Word and the browser. On the other hand, you must insert an equation if you want a MathZoom version of the symbol to pop up in the browser when the symbol is clicked on. This is especially useful when using small, hard-to-read characters such as superscripts, subscripts, primes etc. Don't convert long documents; break them into smaller pieces While a large document may be desirable in Word for editing and printing, it does not translate well into a Web document. Large documents take longer to download, and are more cumbersome for viewing. When you print a long document in Word you get headers and footers inserted on every page. Printing from a browser is different; there are no headers and footers contained in the page itself, and page breaks can occur in the strangest places, sometimes breaking graphics such as equations in half. These problems can be minimized by breaking long documents into smaller sections, and making each one an individual webpage. Also see the section on master documents below. Don't use positioned or floating elements containing equations MathPage currently ignores these items, and although they do get converted into HTML any symbols and equations in these elements will not be handled properly. You can use simple left or right alignment on graphics and other elements to achieve proper display in the browser. Update equations before using MathPage You can use documents containing equations created by other versions of MathType or Equation Editor (including documents authored on a Macintosh computer). In these cases, for best results you should run the Convert Equations command before generating a webpage (you only need to run it once and then save the document). Check the support section of our website regularly. The Technical Notices on the support section of our website contains known issues with some browsers and platforms, and also contains more tips for creating documents in Word that will convert into webpages. See Also Publish to MathPage Dialog Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step


To publish a Word document to a webpage using MathType's MathPage technology, follow these steps: 1. Save your Word document. 2. Choose the Publish to MathPage command from Word's MathType toolbar, menu or Ribbon tab. 3. Edit the Title as necessary. It will appear in the browser's title bar. 4. Choose the File Name for the webpage. The default is to save it in the same folder as the Word document, but with a .htm extension. You can either type in the name of the file or click Browse and choose it in the Save dialog. 5. If you'd like to view the page once it's been generated, check the Display in default browser checkbox. 6. Now you must decide how you want the document's equations displayed in the browser. Unless you're interested in MathML, or are guaranteed that everyone viewing your page has the correct plug-in installed (or can download it), you should choose Use images (GIFs). If you choose images, you can also turn on MathZoom , which allows equations in the webpage to be magnified by clicking on them. If you wish to use MathML, select MathML using and choose a MathML target from the list. A brief description is displayed in the dialog for the selected target. 7. Choose the target browser. Select the Internet Explorer 5 or newer (Windows) option if you know that your webpage will only be viewed by people using such a browser. The page will be smaller, particularly if it contains many mathematical symbols. Otherwise, choose the All browsers option. Note: some MathML targets require a specific browser, in which case only one target browser will be available. 8. The settings for this webpage will be saved in the Word document, and displayed in the dialog if you run this command again. You can also use these settings (other than Title and File Name) as the default values for other webpages by checking the Use settings as defaults checkbox. 9. Click OK to generate the webpage. You'll see a progress dialog appear, and when the page has been generated it will open up in your default browser (if you selected this option). You should examine the webpage and, if you find any problems, modify the original Word document and run this command again. Creating Pages with MathPage contains some tips for creating pages with MathPage technology. The Technical Notices in our support section of our website also contains updated advice on creating the best possible webpages.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Publishing to MathPage using MathML


Although browser support for MathML has greatly improved, there are some different approaches to producing a webpage containing MathML. MathPage supports several targets, described below, that differ in the number and type of browsers that can display the page. We expect most people to use the XHTML+MathML target, which looks like it's becoming the standard format for including MathML in a webpage. These MathML targets are displayed in the Publish to MathPage Dialog: XHTML+MathML This target generates the preferred cross-platform MathML format, an XHTML page containing MathML. We anticipate this will become the standard format for displaying math notation in a webpage. Notably, pages will display properly in Internet Explorer for Windows if MathPlayer 2.0 or newer is also installed. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website . This format will work with the browsers and platforms as shown below. We've listed the minimum required versions, but in general you should always download the latest version. Windows Internet Explorer 6.0+ with MathPlayer 2.0+ Netscape 7.0+/Mozilla 1.0+ Amaya 7.2+ FireFox 1.0+ Netscape 7.1+/Mozilla 1.1+ Netscape 7.0+/Mozilla 1.0+ Amaya 7.2+

Macintosh Linux

MathPlayer (IE behavior) MathPlayer is our MathML display plug-in for Internet Explorer 6 or newer on Windows only. Choose this target if your audience will be using only this browser, but for more flexibility we recommend the XHTML+MathML target. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website . Multi-browser (UMSS) The Universal MathML StyleSheet (UMSS) is an XSLT stylesheet that permits a single webpage containing MathML to be displayed in a variety of different browsers. It determines the current browser and whether it has built-in support for MathML or whether a plugin such as MathPlayer or Techexplorer is available, and then makes the necessary adjustments to the content. It even uses CSS to format equations if no MathML renderer is available. This universality comes at the expense of a slight delay in displaying the document, and the need to distribute a couple of extra files with the webpage (pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl). For more details please see http://www.w3.org/math/xsl . See Also MathML website

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Typing TeX Directly Into Word 2007 (TeX Toggle)


TeX Toggle
The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type Texvc directly into a Word document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the command again will return the MathType equations to Texvc. To enter an Inline Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: $...$ To enter a Display Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: \[...\] To convert a single equation, first highlight it OR place the cursor near it in the same line. Then either: 1. click the Toggle TeX icon in the Publish group of the Ribbon's MathType tab:

2. Type Alt+\ To convert all equations in a region of a document, select the region, and follow one of the two steps above. Note that TeX Toggle will convert all equations found in the highlighted region regardless of whether they are Texvc or MathType equations, so if you select a mix of both MathType and Texvc equations and toggle, the result will again be a mix.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word


In This Chapter Set Equation Preferences Dialog Preview Preferences Dialog Insert Equation Reference Dialog Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog Insert Equation Number Dialog Format Equation Number Dialog Format Equations Dialog Convert Equations Dialog Export Equations Dialog Publish to MathPage Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Set Equation Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to set and/or view the equation preferences (styles, sizes and spacing settings) used for new equations you insert into the current document. The preferences are used only for equations inserted using the commands on the MathType Menu, MathType Toolbar or the MathType Tab in Word 2007.
MathType's 'New Equation' preferences

Choose this option to use MathType's new equation preferences each time you insert a new equation, instead of the equation preferences (if any) of the current document.
This document's equation preferences

Choose this option to use equation preferences in the current document when you insert a new equation. If you have not yet set these preferences, the Load Preferences dialog will be displayed (see Load from MathType Preference File below), allowing you to set them.
Load from MathType Preference File

Click this button to set the equation preferences using a MathType preference file previously created using MathType's Save Equation Preferences Dialog.
Preview

Click this button to view the preferences that will be used for new equations. See the Preview Preferences Dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Preview Preferences Dialog


This dialog displays a list of equation preferences. The preferences are displayed as a list of items and values, as set using MathType's Define Styles, Define Sizes and Define Spacing dialogs. See Also Set Equation Preferences Dialog Format Equations Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Equation Reference Dialog


This dialog appears when you insert an equation reference using the Insert Equation Reference command on the MathType Menu, MathType Toolbar or the MathType Tab in Word 2007. To insert an equation reference at the current location of the insertion point, click OK and then double-click on the equation number that you wish to reference. You can scroll the document to bring the desired equation number into view if necessary. After double-clicking on an equation number, the document will scroll back to the location where the equation reference was inserted. If you are inserting references that aren't very close to the original equations, you can avoid a lot of scrolling backwards and forwards by splitting the Word window into two panes. Then you can insert the references in one pane, and double-click on the equations in the other. Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not wish to see this dialog every time you insert an equation reference. You can also control whether this dialog appears by checking or clearing the Alert when inserting equation references checkbox in the Format Equation Numbers dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog


This dialog allows you to insert a chapter/section break , which defines the chapter and/or section numbers for this portion of the document. These numbers will be displayed in all equation numbers up to the next chapter/section break. The equation number format in use determines the actual display, e.g., whether the Chapter number is displayed. The break simply resets the chapter and/or section number. If your document doesn't contain multiple chapters then ignore the chapter portion of the dialog. If your document contains multiple chapters and/or multiple sections, you'll normally want to increment the numbers, as described below. And when you start a new chapter, you'll usually want to reset the section number back to 1.
Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it turned off.
Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the desired number (or letter) in the box provided. See Also Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the chapter and/or section number for the portion of the document containing the insertion point. As an aid, the chapter/section break that indicates the beginning of the section will be selected and, if necessary, the document will be scrolled to bring the break into view. This dialog is identical to the Insert Chapter/Section Break dialog, with the addition of a Delete button. The dialog's options reflect the breaks' chapter and section number values.
Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it unchecked.
Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the desired number (or letter) in the box provided.
Delete

Click this button to remove the selected chapter/section break , effectively merging the current chapter/section with the previous one (if one exists). See Also Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Equation Number Dialog


This dialog appears the first time you insert an equation number into a document, if you have not already inserted a chapter/section break. An equation chapter/section break lets you define the chapter and/or section number part of an equation number, for example the 2 in the equation number (2.3). If you click OK, an equation section break will be inserted at the start of the document, using the numbers you specify, and then an equation number will be inserted at the current location of the insertion point. If you prefer, you can click Cancel and then insert an equation section break at the location you desire. In this case you will have to choose the Insert Equation Number command again. This dialog will not appear once you have inserted an equation section break, or if you have selected an equation number format that does not include a chapter or section number. Check the Always start new documents with chapter 1, section 1 option if you do not wish to see this dialog the first time you insert an equation number into a document. You can also control whether this dialog appears by checking or clearing the Alert when inserting first equation number checkbox in the Format Equation Numbers dialog. See Also Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog Format Equation Number Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Equation Number Dialog


This dialog lets you set the format for new equation numbers or change the format of existing equation numbers.
Number Format

This section lets you specify a number format. The Simple Format option lets you pick the enclosure, separator and format of each part of the number. All parts are optional; use the checkbox next to each part to include/exclude it from the number. The Preview shows you an example using your format. If you want more control over the format you can choose the Advanced Format option, and then enter the desired format in the Format edit box. All characters in the format are used literally, except for the terms #C, #S and #E. These correspond to the Chapter, Section and Equation parts of the number (and can be in any order). Each of these terms must be followed by another character indicating the numeric format; these correspond to the choices in the menus and are as follows: 1 A a I i Numeric Alphabetic alphabetic Roman roman 1, 2, 3 ... A, B, C ... a, b, c ... I, II, III ... i, ii, iii ...

Thus the format (#C1:#S1-#Ei) would generate the number (1:1-i). The Preview updates as you make changes to the format. A useful tip is to use the Simple Format option to get the format as close as possible to the desired format, then choose the Advanced Format option and make the final changes.
Change the equation number format for

Options in this section control which equation numbers are affected by the settings in this dialog. Choose New equation numbers to affect new equation numbers created with the Insert Equation Number command. Choose Current selection or Whole document to update existing equation numbers.
Options

Update equation numbers automatically Whenever you insert an equation number or an equation reference into a document, all of the existing equation numbers and references are updated so that the numbering sequences are correct. Typically this operation doesn't take very long, but if you are running on a slower computer, or you are working on a large document, then this process may start taking a while. If so, you can turn off this option, which prevents the update from automatically taking place. If you turn off automatic updating, you must manually update the numbers using the Update Equation Numbers command. You must also use this command if you move or delete an equation number, as the automatic updating doesn't occur in these situations. Alert when inserting first equation number The first time an equation number is inserted into a document, the document is checked to make sure it contains an initial chapter/section break . If it doesn't, the default behavior is to present a dialog asking for the starting chapter and section numbers. If you uncheck this option, starting values of 1 will be inserted without the dialog appearing. Alert when inserting equation references When an equation reference is inserted into a document, the default behavior is to present a dialog that reminds you to double-click on an equation number to actually insert the reference. If you uncheck this option, this dialog will no longer appear. Use format as default for new documents Check this option if you want to use the current format as the default for all new documents. The first time you insert an equation number into a new document, the format is saved with the document. This means that the default format only affects documents that haven't had equation numbers inserted. See Also Insert Equation Number Dialog Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Equations Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word EQ field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences (styles, sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document. Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range that omits them. Format equations using preferences from: Use this section to select how you want the equations to look by selecting equation preferences that will be used in the formatting operation. Current document Choose this option if you want to use the current document's equation preferences. This option will only be available if you have set the equation preferences for the document. See the Set Equation Preferences Dialog. MathType's 'New Equation' preferences Choose this option if you want to use the preferences MathType is currently configured to use for new equations. Equation on clipboard Choose this option to reformat the equations to have the same format as an existing equation. In preparation for using this option, copy the equation on which you want to base the formatting to the clipboard . The equation may be in the current document, any other document, or in a MathType equation window. This option will only be available if there is an equation on the clipboard. MathType preference file Choose this option to format the equations based on the equation preferences you have previously saved in a file using the Save to File command on MathType's Equation Preferences menu. Use the Browse button to locate the file. Use for new equations Check this box to use the selected equation preferences for new equations you create in this document. Preview Click this button to view the style, size and spacing definitions you've selected. See the Preview Preferences Dialog. Range These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be formatted: Whole document will format all equations in the document, while Current selection will only format those equations in the current selection.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Convert Equations Dialog


The Convert Equations dialog is used to convert equations in your document between various equation types. This is useful, for example, when you want to convert some or all of the Equation Editor equations in a Word document into MathType equations, or to convert graphic equations into a text-based language, such as TeX or MathML, for which there is a MathType Translator available.
Equation types to convert:

Only the equation types checked in this group will be converted. The equation types that can be converted are: MathType or Equation Editor equations This includes equations created by any version of MathType or Equation Editor. They can be OLE objects, GIF images, or MathType 1.x macros. Microsoft Word EQ fields These are equation fields inserted using Word's Insert Field command. Prior to the introduction of Equation Editor with Word for Windows 2.0, this was the only way to insert mathematical equations into Word documents. MathType translator text equations This is any equation created using a MathType Translator (which creates text-based equation formats such as TeX or MathML). In order for this option to work the equations must contain both MathType and translator information. This information is included by MathType when you turn on the Include translator name in translation and Include MathType data in translation options in MathType's Translators Dialog, and when you turn on the equivalent options in the Convert equations to group in this dialog. Word 2007 (OMML) equations Word 2007 included a new equation editor that utilizes the Office Math Markup Language (OMML). This dialog option converts OMML equations into MathType equations or into text, as selected in the Convert equations to group in this dialog. This feature is not available in all versions of Word.See <link>System Requirements for Converting Word 2007 (OMML) Equations for more information. You must select at least one equation type, or no equations will be converted.
Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be converted: Whole document will convert all equations in the document, while Current selection will only convert those equations in the current selection.
Prompt before converting each equation

Check this option to be prompted before each equation is converted. This gives you an opportunity to skip equations you do not want to convert.
Convert equations to

Options in this section allow you to specify the type of equation to which to convert. MathType equations (OLE objects) This will result in normal MathType graphic equation objects. Text using MathType translator This will result in each equation being converted to plain text using the currently selected translator. The other options in this section allow you to choose the translator and to determine whether MathType's internal data gets included in the translation. If you convert equations to text using one of the translators, and think you might want to convert them to another format in the future, turn on the Include translator name as a comment and Include MathType data as a comment options. See the Translators Dialog for more details.
Convert

Click this button to convert all equations that match the given criteria.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Export Equations Dialog


This dialog allows you to export the MathType (and Equation Editor) equations in your Word document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word document into a desktop publishing application.
Export To

You can type in the name and location of the folder in which you want to export the equation files, or you can choose an existing location using the Browse button. If you're continually exporting files to the same folder, it can be useful to have it cleaned out before the export begins. The Delete all files of same type in folder option is provided for this purpose. However, be careful that you've chosen the correct folder or you may delete files that you didn't mean to!
File Format

This section lets you choose a File type , a File name pattern, and the First number with which to begin numbering files. The number gets incremented for each exported equation, and inserted into the filename in place of the # characters in the pattern. For example, with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. Using multiple # characters helps in making all filenames the same minimum length, which causes them to display in the correct sequence when sorted. Select Replace equation with file name to replace each equation with its filename enclosed in double angle brackets, e.g., <<Eqn005.eps>>.
Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document from which equations will be exported: Whole document will export all equations in the document, while Current selection will only export those equations in the current selection. See Also Exporting Equations Step-by-Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Publish to MathPage Dialog


This dialog allows you to convert a Word document to a webpage in which the equations display and print properly. Creating Pages with MathPage contains additional information about this feature. We strongly recommend that you read it first. It explains the process more fully, and contains many tips for creating great webpages.
Document

This section lets you set the Title of the webpage and its File Name . Display in default browser will open the generated page in your default Web browser after the generation process has completed.
Equations

In this section you can choose how equations will be represented in the webpage: either using GIF images or MathML. If you choose Use images (GIFs), a set of GIF files is created for every equation (and some symbols). When the page is viewed in a browser, dynamic HTML is used to select the appropriate image depending on the resolution of the monitor. This makes the size of the equation more closely match the size of the surrounding text. A high-resolution image is used when the page is printed, again making the equation match the rest of the document. You can also choose to use our MathZoom technology, which zooms (magnifies) equations when you click on them, allowing you to see clearly subscripts, superscripts, hats and primes. Equations can also be represented as MathML. MathML is a World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) specified language for expressing mathematics (for more details visit their website at http://www.w3.org/math ). There are several different ways that it can be used, depending upon the browser and/or plug-in that you and your audience are using. When you select MathML using, the dialog contains a list of MathML targets from which you can choose. A page generated for a given MathML target may not display properly when viewed in another browser or without the required plug-in being installed.
Target Browser

In this section, you can choose the target browser (some MathML targets require a specific browser and one of the browser choices may be disabled). Microsoft's Internet Explorer 5 for Windows and newer can display many symbols correctly, while other browsers require GIF images to be used for some symbols. If you're sure the audience for your pages will only be using IE5 and newer for Windows, select this choice as the page will download slightly faster. Otherwise choose the All browsers option. We've tested pages generated with MathPage extensively and have compiled helpful information. You can view a list of known issues with various browsers and other MathPage details by searching through our Technical Notices in the support section of our website.
Use settings as defaults

Select this item to use the selected settings the first time Export to MathPage is used on any documents in the future. If Export to MathPage has already been used on a document, its previous settings will display and not these defaults.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint


In This Chapter MathType tab in Microsoft PowerPoint

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType tab in Microsoft PowerPoint


In This Chapter Insert Equation Group Browse Group Help Group

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Equation Group

Insert Equation Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Browse Group

The Browse group allows you to search back and forth through the slides for equations.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Help Group

MathType Help Contents and Index... Opens MathType Help Using MathType in Word... Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word Unlock/Register MathType... Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing. About MathType... Displays MathType's About box showing you: The version of the MathType application you are currently using Copyright information Your product registration information, including your product key if you have unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in evaluation mode MathType on the Web MathType Home Page... Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English). Online Support... Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and information on compatibility with other applications. Send Feedback by Email... Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report, please visit our online tech support area first. Order MathType... Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products). Future MathType Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Office 2000, 2002 and 2003


In This Chapter MathType's Support for Microsoft Word MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType's Support for Microsoft Word


In This Chapter Support for Microsoft Word MathType Menu MathType Toolbar Inserting MathType Equations Numbering Equations Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step Browsing by Equation Numbers, References and Chapter/Section Breaks Using Equation Preferences Format Equations Format Equations Step-by-Step Converting Equations Converting Equations Step-by-Step Exporting Equations Exporting Equations Step-by-Step Creating Webpages with MathPage Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step Publishing to MathPage using MathML Typing TeX Directly Into Word (TeX Toggle) Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Support for Microsoft Word


MathType adds several commands to Microsoft Word that you will find useful when creating and working with documents containing equations. The commands are displayed in the MathType Menu on the Word menu bar and the most frequently used commands are also available in the MathType Toolbar. Here are some of the tasks you can perform: Insert equations into your document. There are separate commands for inserting inline equations , display equations , and left- or right-numbered display equations. See Inserting MathType Equations, Left-Numbered Display Equation, and RightNumbered Display Equation. Set the equation preferences to be used for new equations in the document. See Using Equation Preferences. Convert documents into Web pages using the Publish to MathPage command. See Publish to MathPage Dialog. Export equations in a Word document to individual graphics files with the Export Equations command. See Export Equations Dialog. Change the format of equations in the current selection or the entire document. See Format Equations. Add equation numbers and references that will automatically be renumbered after editing. See Numbering Equations. Convert Equation Editor equations to MathType equations. See Converting Equations. Convert equations to TeX, MathML, or any other language for which we have a translator. Browse by Equations, Equation Numbers, and Chapter/Section Breaks See Translators. The MathType Setup application automatically installs MathType's support for Word, for each version of Word it detects on your computer. However, if you install a new version of Word after you install MathType, the commands will not be available for the new version of Word. In this case just re-install MathType. If you want to remove the MathType commands temporarily from Word, choose Templates and Add-Ins on the Tools menu and uncheck the box next to the MathType Commands item. To remove them permanently, quit Word and remove the MathType 6 Commands for Word file from Word's startup folder. See Also MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Menu
The MathType menu added to Word's menu bar contains the complete set of MathType commands for Word. In order to conserve screen space, the MathType Toolbar contains only the most frequently used commands, by default. See the Note on the MathType Toolbar page for the way to customize the toolbar. The commands apply to the current document only. The menu contains the following commands: Set Equation Preferences This command opens the Set Equation Preferences Dialog, which allows you to specify the equation preferences to be used for new equations you insert into the document. Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation. If you have defined equation preferences for new equations (using the Set Equation Preferences command), these settings will be used in the MathType window. Otherwise MathType's current preferences for new equations will be used. The resulting equation is inserted inline, i.e., aligned with the surrounding text. Insert Display Equation Alt+Q Opens a new MathType window using equation preferences as described above under Insert Inline Equation. The display equation is inserted on a new line and centered between the left and right margins. To simplify changing the formatting for all of the display equations in a document, a Word style called MTDisplayEquation is created that defines the position of the center tab stop. This means that you can change the alignment of all of the display equations in a document by simply modifying this style. Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a left-aligned equation number before the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the center tab stop. Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q Similar to Insert Display Equation, but also inserts a right-aligned equation number following the equation. The MTDisplayEquation style defines the location of the right margin tab stop. Insert Equation Number Inserts an equation number at the insertion point. The default format includes a section number and an equation number. The equation number increments each time you insert a number; you define the section number using the Insert Equation Section Break command. Use the Format Equation Numbers command to set or change the number format. Insert Equation Reference Inserts a reference to an existing equation number. It inserts a copy of the referenced equation number at the insertion point. In addition, if you double-click on a reference your document will scroll to the referenced equation. When equation numbers are updated, equation references will be updated as well. Place the insertion point at the place where you wish to insert the reference, and choose this command (the Insert Equation Reference Dialog will appear). Next, double-click on the equation number you want to reference (you may have to scroll the document to find the equation). Insert Chapter/Section Break Opens the Insert Equation Section Break Dialog, which allows you to insert an equation section break. Equation sections define the section number used in equation numbers. Modify Chapter/Section Break Opens the Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog, which allows you to locate and modify the current chapter/section break (the one preceding the current position of the insertion point). Format Equation Numbers Opens the Format Equation Numbers Dialog, which allows you to change the format of new and/or existing equation numbers. You can also turn off automatic updating of equation numbers and references in this dialog.

Update Equation Numbers Updates all equation numbers and equation references in the document, including those in footnotes and endnotes. You need to use this command if you turn off automatic updating in the Format Equation Numbers Dialog, or if you move or delete any equation numbers in your document. Format Equations Opens the Format Equations Dialog, which allows you to change the format of the equations in the current selection or the entire document. Convert Equations Opens the Convert Equations Dialog, which allows you to convert equations in your document to a format you specify (including TeX or MathML). Export Equations Opens the Export Equations Dialog, which allows you to export the equations in your document into individual graphics files. Publish to MathPage Opens the Publish to MathPage Dialog, which allows you to export the document as a webpage including MathPage technology to handle the equations. MathType Help Contents and Index... Opens MathType Help Using MathType in Word... Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word Unlock/Register MathType... Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing. About MathType... Displays MathType's About box showing you: The version of the MathType application you are currently using Copyright information Your product registration information, including your product key if you have unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in evaluation mode MathType on the Web MathType Home Page... Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English). Online Support... Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and information on compatibility with other applications. Send Feedback by Email... Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report, please visit our online tech support area first. Order MathType... Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products). Future MathType Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Toolbar
The MathType toolbar contains the most frequently used commands on the MathType menu, by default. See the Note below on how to add commands to the toolbar. You can hide or show the MathType toolbar by right-clicking in any of Word's toolbars and using the checkbox next to the MathType entry in the list that appears.

The toolbar contains the following commands (refer to the MathType menu descriptions for more information about the commands): Insert Inline Equation Ctrl+Alt+Q Insert Display Equation Alt+Q Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation Alt+Shift+Q Insert Equation Number Insert Equation Reference Insert Chapter/Section Break Update Equation Numbers Publish to MathPage Browse Equations, Equation Numbers and Chapter Headings Note: You can add commands to the MathType toolbar using Word's Customize command on the Tools menu. Click on the MathType menu and Ctrl-drag the desired command to the toolbar (if you don't hold down the Ctrl key then the command is moved, not copied). Right-click on the command in the toolbar and choose Default Style to make the icon appear.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Inserting MathType Equations


The MathType commands for Word provide five methods for inserting MathType equations into Word documents. These are: Inserting an inline equation Inserting a display equation Inserting a right-numbered display equation Inserting a left-numbered display equation We recommend that you always use one of these commands to insert equations as they work properly with the Using Equation Preferences commands that help ensure consistency between the equations in your documents. The Insert Inline Equation command inserts a MathType equation at the insertion point. The equation is adjusted to align itself with the surrounding text, so use this command when you want to insert an equation in a sentence. Note: While you can create inline equations consisting of a single symbol, we recommend you use Word's Insert Symbol command instead. Equations have more overhead in the document, and for large documents the difference can be significant. The Insert Display Equation and Insert Left/Right-Numbered Display Equation commands are very similar. All insert a new line if the insertion point isn't already on a new line, and then insert an equation centered between the left and right margins. The Insert Right-Numbered Display Equation command inserts a right-justified equation number following the equation, while the Insert Left-Numbered Display Equation command inserts a left-aligned equation number before the equation. A Word style named MTDisplayEquation is added to the Word document the first time you use any of these three commands. This style defines the center tab and the right tab positions. Its other formatting is based on the style in use at the time it's created. You can change the alignment of all the display equations in a document by modifying this style using the Style command on Word's Format menu. This style is created separately for each document into which you insert a display equation. The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type TeX or LaTeX directly into a Word document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the command again will return the MathType equations to TeX. When typing TeX, using either the $...$ or \(...\) delimiters results in a MathType Inline Equation after applying the toggle, and using either the $$...$$ or \[...\] delimiters results in a MathType Display Equation after the toggle. To use the toggle with a single equation, click the Toggle MathType/TeX icon (in the Publish group of the Ribbon's MathType tab) and the equation nearest the insertion point will be converted to a MathType equation. To convert the entire document, select the document contents (Ctrl+A); to convert part of it, select the part you want to convert. Click the toggle. To convert the equations back, repeat the procedure.

Inserting and Opening Equations Using Keyboard Shortcuts


MathType equations can be inserted in a Microsoft Word document using keyboard shortcuts. The equation will be inserted at the current cursor location in the document. There are shortcuts for each type of MathType equation. Insert display equation (Alt+Q) Insert inline equation (Crtl+Alt+Q) Insert right-numbered equation (Alt+Shift+Q) Insert left-numbered equation (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Q) There are also keyboard shortcuts for opening an existing equation in MathType for editing. Select the equation to be edited, and use the following: Edit equation in place in the document (Alt+E) Open equation for editing in a separate MathType window (Alt+O)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Numbering Equations
The equation numbering commands allow you to insert equation numbers in a Word document in a variety of formats. You can also insert references to these numbers. Both numbers and references are automatically updated whenever you add new equation numbers to the document. Equation references can also be placed in footnotes and endnotes. The equation numbers are quite separate from equations in a Word document. If you delete an equation its equation number (if any) is not automatically deleted. Similarly, an equation reference is actually a reference to an equation number, rather than a reference to the equation itself. The format of equation numbers in a document is defined using the Format Equation Number Dialog. Equation numbers are comprised of a chapter number, a section number, a separator, an equation number and an enclosure. This allows numbers such as (1.1.1), [I.i] or {A.a}. The chapter number, section number, separator and enclosure are all optional, so you can create equation numbers such as (1.1), 1.1, or just 1 or a. If you are using the chapter and/or section numbers, you must insert a chapter/section break before the first number to define the chapter/section values. A break can have an explicit value or be set to increment by one the value of the preceding equation section. As you edit a document, equation numbers or references may get out of sequence (e.g., you move sections around). Use the Update Equation Numbers command in the toolbar and the MathType menu to update the sequence. If you select a region of your document, only this region will be updated, which can be useful with very large documents where updating can take a relatively long time. Note for users of previous versions of MathType The equation numbering in MathType 5 and later is more sophisticated than in previous versions of MathType. It is fully compatible with older documents; they'll display properly and you can insert equation numbers and references. If you modify the number format with the MathType 5 or later command, however, a MathType 4 user will not be able to insert equation numbers using the new format. The document will still display and print properly. See Also Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step by Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Inserting Equation Numbers and References Step-by-Step


To insert equation numbers and references in a Word document, follow these steps. 1. Define the desired number format for this document using the Format Equation Numbers command. You can change this format at any time, for either all existing equation numbers, just the selected equation numbers or for new equation numbers. 2. Create a chapter/section break using the Insert Chapter/Section Break command. You should insert this in the document ahead of the first equation number you plan to add. The breaks are inserted as hidden text so that they won't normally appear. 3. Place the insertion point at the desired location and use the Insert Equation Number command to insert an equation number. 4. To insert a reference to this equation number, place the insertion point in the desired location for the reference and choose the Insert Equation Reference command. Then, double-click on the equation number to be referenced, and the reference will be inserted at the original location. 5. To modify the chapter and/or section values of a break, use the Modify Chapter/Section Break command. The closest preceding chapter/section break will be made visible and selected, and in the dialog that appears you can modify or delete the break. 6. To view all chapter/section breaks, click the Show/Hide button in Word. To hide them, click this button again (you don't need to hide them when printing, as they won't appear in the printed output). When equation section breaks are shown, a quick way to open the Modify Chapter/Section Break dialog is to double-click on a break. 7. If you insert equation numbers out of sequence, the existing numbers and references will be automatically updated. If you copy, move or delete an equation number or reference, however, you must use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the sequence. 8. The equation number updating that occurs after you insert an equation number is usually very fast. However, you may find this updating takes a while if you are working on a slower computer or on a large document containing many equation numbers and references. The Format Equation Number Dialog contains an option to turn off automatic updating. After you've finished entering equation numbers, be sure to use the Update Equation Numbers command to refresh the numbering sequence. Note: Update Equation Numbers works on selected text, or the whole document if there's no selection. For large documents it may be faster to select and update just the section of the document that requires it. But if you've made lots of changes, it's safest to update the entire document. Note: If you have not set your Chapter/Section breaks first time you insert an equation number or a numbered equation, the Insert Equation Number Dialog appears, which allows you to set the chapter/number breaks.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Browsing by Equation Numbers, References and Chapter/Section Breaks


The MathType browse controls allow you to search through your documents for three types of objects: Equations Traverses all equations. Equation Numbers Steps though all the Equation Numbers created by MathType. Chapter/Section breaks Helps find the normally invisible Chapter/Section breaks. The current chapter/section break will appear in red until you click the Previous or Next buttons, or elsewhere in the document. To start the search, select the object to search for and click the Next or Previous buttons. The browse feature will search all visible parts of the document starting at cursor position. This includes headers and footers, if visible.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using Equation Preferences


When you create a document containing equations, you typically want all of the equations to use the same fonts, sizes and spacing so that they look consistent throughout the document. We recommend that you save these equation settings in a MathType preference file so that you can reload them into MathType if you need to create new equations in this particular document again. (MathType equations contain the preferences they were created with, and these preferences are used when the equation is edited in MathType). However, you may be working on several different documents that each use different equation preferences. In this situation it can be awkward to keep loading preference files, and even to remember which preference file is associated with each Word document. The Equation Preferences command allows you to save equation preferences inside your Word document. Whenever you insert a new equation in this document these preferences will be used for the new equation instead of MathType's current preference settings for new equations. This allows you to create equations that look similar without having to remember which preference file you originally used. Also, if you send the Word document to another MathType user any equations they insert will also use the correct equation preferences. To save equation preferences in a document, follow these steps: 1. In MathType, set your desired preferences using the Define Styles, Define Sizes, and Define Spacing dialogs. 2. Save these preferences as a MathType preference file using the Save Preferences Dialog. 3. In Word, open the document and choose the Set Equation Preferences command on the MathType Menu or Equation Preferences on the Mathtype Tab. 4. In the Set Equation Preferences Dialog choose the This document's equation preferences option, click the Load from MathType preference file button and select the file you just saved. 5. You can view the preferences by clicking the Preview button. 6. Click OK and the contents of the file will be copied into the Word document (for the curious, they are saved as a custom document property).

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Equations
This command allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word EQ field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences (styles, sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document. Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range that omits them. See Also Format Equations Step-by-Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Equations Step-by-Step


To re-format the equations in a Word document, follow these steps: 1. Save a copy of your Word document. (This is always a good idea.) 2. Select the equations you want to re-format, or make no selection to re-format the whole document. 3. Choose or click Format Equations to open the Format Equations dialog. 4. Select the equation preferences you want to use for the equations. If you've set up preferences for this document with the Set Equation Preferences command, the Current document option will be enabled. If you've copied an equation to the clipboard before running this command, Equation on clipboard will be enabled. You can also use the preferences MathType is currently using for new equations, or you can pick an existing MathType equation preferences file. You can see the details of the selected preferences by clicking the Preview button, which opens the Preview Preferences Dialog. 5. Check the Use for new equations checkbox to use the selected preferences for new equations inserted into this document. This is equivalent to using the Set Equation Preferences command as well (if you've chosen the Current document option, then this is redundant). 6. Click OK and the formatting process will start. Word's status bar displays a count of the number of equations processed, and when the process has completed a dialog will display a summary. See Also Format Equations Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Converting Equations
The Convert Equations command enables you to convert equations in a Word document into a variety of formats. You can choose to convert MathType and Equation Editor equations, Word EQ formulas, Word 2007 (OMML) equation images, and MathType translated text equations into MathType 6 equations or text equations. OMML (Office Math Markup Language) equation images are created when a document is created in Word 2007, the document includes equations created with the OMML equation editor, and the document is subsequently saved in Compatibility Mode (i.e., as a doc file). MathType text equations are equations translated into a text representation using MathType's Working With TeX or Working With MathML. These equations can be converted back into MathType equations, or translated into yet another text equation, provided that both the translator name and the MathType data are preserved within the equation. If just the MathType data is preserved, the text can be pasted into a MathType window. You should always use this command when opening a document that has been authored or modified on another platform i.e., Macintosh. Although Word does a good job of converting graphics, equations many not display correctly, and font differences between the platforms inevitably cause display problems as well. Running this command converts and reformats the equations, solving these problems. You should also use this command after opening a document containing OMML equation images. See Also Converting Equations Step-by-Step Obtaining OMML to MathML Conversion Stylesheets

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Converting Equations Step-by-Step


To convert equations in a Word document, follow these steps: 1. Save a copy of your Word document just in case you don't like the results; a conversion of many equations is not easy to undo. 2. Select the equations you wish to convert, or make no selection to scan the entire document. 3. Use the Convert Equations command to open the Convert Equations Dialog. 4. Select the equation types to convert from, and to convert to. If necessary, select the desired translator. If using a translator, turn on the Include translator name as comment and Include MathType data as comment options if you might want to convert these equations again. 5. Select the Prompt before converting each equation option if you want to choose which equations to convert and which to skip. 6. Click OK and the conversion process will begin. Feedback about the progress of the command is displayed in Word's status bar. When the command has finished a dialog displays the number of equations converted.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Exporting Equations
The Export Equations command allows you to export MathType and Equation Editor equations in your Word document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word document into a desktop publishing application. One file will be created for each equation in the document. You can choose the format of the files: EPS, Windows Metafile (WMF) or GIF . The files are numbered sequentially, starting with any number you choose, and you can define the underlying pattern, e.g., Physics001.eps, Physics002.eps, etc. You can also choose to replace each exported equation in the document with the name of its corresponding file, e.g., <<Physics001.eps>>. See Also Exporting Equations Step-by-Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Exporting Equations Step-by-Step


To export equations from a Word document, follow these steps: 1. Save a copy of your Word document (this is always a good idea). 2. Select the equations you wish to export, or make no selection to export all equations in the document. 3. Use the Export Equations command to open the Export Equations Dialog. 4. Enter the name of the folder in which you want to create the exported equation files. You can either type in the name of a folder (it doesn't have to exist), or click Browse and select an existing folder. 5. Check the Delete all files of same type in folder option if you want to delete all existing files in the folder with the same extension. This can be very useful, but be careful you've chosen the correct folder! 6. Choose the export format from the list. The format determines the file extension that will be used. 7. Select a pattern for the filenames, and the starting number. The pattern must contain at least one '#' character. The # characters are replaced by a sequential number to make every filename unique. Use multiple # characters if you want the numbers to have leading zeros (this will make them display in a more natural order in sorted lists). For example, with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. The # characters don't limit the maximum number, so the above pattern can generate filenames such as Eqn1000.eps if there are this many equations in the document. 8. Check the Replace equation with file name option if you want the equations in the document replaced with the name of the corresponding file, e.g., <<Eqn001.eps>>. 9. Choose the Whole document or Current selection option based on how much of the document you want to export from, and what you did in Step 2. 10. Click OK to start the exporting process. Word's status bar will show the progress, and once the process has completed a summary is displayed.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Creating Webpages with MathPage


MathType's MathPage technology enables you to convert a Word document containing equations, equation numbers and equation references into a webpage. The page will look virtually the same in your browser as it does in Word. Inline equations will be correctly aligned, display equations will be properly centered, and all equations will display and print as well as from Word itself. This is true for all of the major browsers, running on Windows, Macintosh and Linux/Unix platforms. Tips for Better Webpages The following tips will help you create better webpages using MathPage. Use tables for alignment Tabs do not work well in browsers for aligning items on multiple lines. Word 97 in particular handles them quite poorly when producing a webpage. If you need a specific layout use Word's tables. Word's Convert Text To Table command on the Table menu greatly simplifies converting existing tab-aligned paragraphs to Tables. After converting to a table, select each column of the table and select Left, Right, or Center alignment to achieve the equivalent result as a Left, Right, or Center tab. Use the MathType Commands for Word to insert equations This is especially true for display equations that you want centered in a paragraph. MathPage does a good job of handling the various ways that you can center an equation and generating the correct HTML, but it works most reliably if you use MathType's Insert Display Equation and Insert Numbered Display Equation commands in Word. Use Word's Insert Symbol command for mathematical symbols This is far more efficient than creating a MathType equation containing only a few symbols, both for Word and the browser. On the other hand, you must insert an equation if you want a MathZoom version of the symbol to pop up in the browser when the symbol is clicked on. This is especially useful when using small, hard-to-read characters such as superscripts, subscripts, primes etc. Don't convert long documents; break them into smaller pieces While a large document may be desirable in Word for editing and printing, it does not translate well into a Web document. Large documents take longer to download, and are more cumbersome for viewing. When you print a long document in Word you get headers and footers inserted on every page. Printing from a browser is different; there are no headers and footers contained in the page itself, and page breaks can occur in the strangest places, sometimes breaking graphics such as equations in half. These problems can be minimized by breaking long documents into smaller sections, and making each one an individual webpage. Also see the section on master documents below. Don't use positioned or floating elements containing equations MathPage currently ignores these items, and although they do get converted into HTML any symbols and equations in these elements will not be handled properly. You can use simple left or right alignment on graphics and other elements to achieve proper display in the browser. Update equations before using MathPage You can use documents containing equations created by other versions of MathType or Equation Editor (including documents authored on a Macintosh computer). In these cases, for best results you should run the Convert Equations command before generating a webpage (you only need to run it once and then save the document). Check the support section of our website regularly. The Technical Notices on the support section of our website contains known issues with some browsers and platforms, and also contains more tips for creating documents in Word that will convert into webpages. See Also Publish to MathPage Dialog Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Publishing to MathPage Step-by-Step


To publish a Word document to a webpage using MathType's MathPage technology, follow these steps: 1. Save your Word document. 2. Choose the Publish to MathPage command from Word's MathType toolbar, menu or Ribbon tab. 3. Edit the Title as necessary. It will appear in the browser's title bar. 4. Choose the File Name for the webpage. The default is to save it in the same folder as the Word document, but with a .htm extension. You can either type in the name of the file or click Browse and choose it in the Save dialog. 5. If you'd like to view the page once it's been generated, check the Display in default browser checkbox. 6. Now you must decide how you want the document's equations displayed in the browser. Unless you're interested in MathML, or are guaranteed that everyone viewing your page has the correct plug-in installed (or can download it), you should choose Use images (GIFs). If you choose images, you can also turn on MathZoom , which allows equations in the webpage to be magnified by clicking on them. If you wish to use MathML, select MathML using and choose a MathML target from the list. A brief description is displayed in the dialog for the selected target. 7. Choose the target browser. Select the Internet Explorer 5 or newer (Windows) option if you know that your webpage will only be viewed by people using such a browser. The page will be smaller, particularly if it contains many mathematical symbols. Otherwise, choose the All browsers option. Note: some MathML targets require a specific browser, in which case only one target browser will be available. 8. The settings for this webpage will be saved in the Word document, and displayed in the dialog if you run this command again. You can also use these settings (other than Title and File Name) as the default values for other webpages by checking the Use settings as defaults checkbox. 9. Click OK to generate the webpage. You'll see a progress dialog appear, and when the page has been generated it will open up in your default browser (if you selected this option). You should examine the webpage and, if you find any problems, modify the original Word document and run this command again. Creating Pages with MathPage contains some tips for creating pages with MathPage technology. The Technical Notices in our support section of our website also contains updated advice on creating the best possible webpages.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Publishing to MathPage using MathML


Although browser support for MathML has greatly improved, there are some different approaches to producing a webpage containing MathML. MathPage supports several targets, described below, that differ in the number and type of browsers that can display the page. We expect most people to use the XHTML+MathML target, which looks like it's becoming the standard format for including MathML in a webpage. These MathML targets are displayed in the Publish to MathPage Dialog: XHTML+MathML This target generates the preferred cross-platform MathML format, an XHTML page containing MathML. We anticipate this will become the standard format for displaying math notation in a webpage. Notably, pages will display properly in Internet Explorer for Windows if MathPlayer 2.0 or newer is also installed. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website . This format will work with the browsers and platforms as shown below. We've listed the minimum required versions, but in general you should always download the latest version. Windows Internet Explorer 6.0+ with MathPlayer 2.0+ Netscape 7.0+/Mozilla 1.0+ Amaya 7.2+ FireFox 1.0+ Netscape 7.1+/Mozilla 1.1+ Netscape 7.0+/Mozilla 1.0+ Amaya 7.2+

Macintosh Linux

MathPlayer (IE behavior) MathPlayer is our MathML display plug-in for Internet Explorer 6 or newer on Windows only. Choose this target if your audience will be using only this browser, but for more flexibility we recommend the XHTML+MathML target. For more details please visit the MathPlayer website . Multi-browser (UMSS) The Universal MathML StyleSheet (UMSS) is an XSLT stylesheet that permits a single webpage containing MathML to be displayed in a variety of different browsers. It determines the current browser and whether it has built-in support for MathML or whether a plugin such as MathPlayer or Techexplorer is available, and then makes the necessary adjustments to the content. It even uses CSS to format equations if no MathML renderer is available. This universality comes at the expense of a slight delay in displaying the document, and the need to distribute a couple of extra files with the webpage (pmathml.xsl and pmathmlcss.xsl). For more details please see http://www.w3.org/math/xsl . See Also MathML website

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Typing TeX Directly Into Word (TeX Toggle)


TeX Toggle
The Toggle MathType/TeX command allows you to type Texvc directly into a Word document and convert it into a MathType equation. Since it's a "toggle", choosing the command again will return the MathType equations to Texvc. To enter an Inline Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: $...$ To enter a Display Equation, the Texvc must be delimited as: \[...\] To convert a single equation, first highlight it OR place the cursor near it in the same line. Then either: 1. Select the Toggle MathType / Tex option on the MathType menu

2. Select the TeX Toggle toolbar button:

3. Type Alt+\ To convert all equations in a region of a document, select the region, and follow one of the two steps above. Note that TeX Toggle will convert all equations found in the highlighted region regardless of whether they are Texvc or MathType equations, so if you select a mix of both MathType and Texvc equations and toggle, the result will again be a mix.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Reference: MathType Dialogs in Word


In This Chapter Set Equation Preferences Dialog Preview Preferences Dialog Insert Equation Reference Dialog Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog Insert Equation Number Dialog Format Equation Number Dialog Format Equations Dialog Convert Equations Dialog Export Equations Dialog Publish to MathPage Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Set Equation Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to set and/or view the equation preferences (styles, sizes and spacing settings) used for new equations you insert into the current document. The preferences are used only for equations inserted using the commands on the MathType Menu, MathType Toolbar or the MathType Tab in Word 2007.
MathType's 'New Equation' preferences

Choose this option to use MathType's new equation preferences each time you insert a new equation, instead of the equation preferences (if any) of the current document.
This document's equation preferences

Choose this option to use equation preferences in the current document when you insert a new equation. If you have not yet set these preferences, the Load Preferences dialog will be displayed (see Load from MathType Preference File below), allowing you to set them.
Load from MathType Preference File

Click this button to set the equation preferences using a MathType preference file previously created using MathType's Save Equation Preferences Dialog.
Preview

Click this button to view the preferences that will be used for new equations. See the Preview Preferences Dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Preview Preferences Dialog


This dialog displays a list of equation preferences. The preferences are displayed as a list of items and values, as set using MathType's Define Styles, Define Sizes and Define Spacing dialogs. See Also Set Equation Preferences Dialog Format Equations Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Equation Reference Dialog


This dialog appears when you insert an equation reference using the Insert Equation Reference command on the MathType Menu, MathType Toolbar or the MathType Tab in Word 2007. To insert an equation reference at the current location of the insertion point, click OK and then double-click on the equation number that you wish to reference. You can scroll the document to bring the desired equation number into view if necessary. After double-clicking on an equation number, the document will scroll back to the location where the equation reference was inserted. If you are inserting references that aren't very close to the original equations, you can avoid a lot of scrolling backwards and forwards by splitting the Word window into two panes. Then you can insert the references in one pane, and double-click on the equations in the other. Check the Don't show me this again option if you do not wish to see this dialog every time you insert an equation reference. You can also control whether this dialog appears by checking or clearing the Alert when inserting equation references checkbox in the Format Equation Numbers dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog


This dialog allows you to insert a chapter/section break , which defines the chapter and/or section numbers for this portion of the document. These numbers will be displayed in all equation numbers up to the next chapter/section break. The equation number format in use determines the actual display, e.g., whether the Chapter number is displayed. The break simply resets the chapter and/or section number. If your document doesn't contain multiple chapters then ignore the chapter portion of the dialog. If your document contains multiple chapters and/or multiple sections, you'll normally want to increment the numbers, as described below. And when you start a new chapter, you'll usually want to reset the section number back to 1.
Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it turned off.
Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the desired number (or letter) in the box provided. See Also Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Modify Chapter/Section Break Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the chapter and/or section number for the portion of the document containing the insertion point. As an aid, the chapter/section break that indicates the beginning of the section will be selected and, if necessary, the document will be scrolled to bring the break into view. This dialog is identical to the Insert Chapter/Section Break dialog, with the addition of a Delete button. The dialog's options reflect the breaks' chapter and section number values.
Chapter

Choose the New Chapter option to define the chapter number. Once selected, you can choose the Next chapter number option to increment the chapter number by 1, or choose the Chapter number option and enter the desired number. If you aren't using chapters and chapter numbers, you can ignore this option and leave it unchecked.
Section

These options work similarly to the chapter options. Choose the Next section number option to increment the section number by 1, or choose the Section number option and enter the desired number (or letter) in the box provided.
Delete

Click this button to remove the selected chapter/section break , effectively merging the current chapter/section with the previous one (if one exists). See Also Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Equation Number Dialog


This dialog appears the first time you insert an equation number into a document, if you have not already inserted a chapter/section break. An equation chapter/section break lets you define the chapter and/or section number part of an equation number, for example the 2 in the equation number (2.3). If you click OK, an equation section break will be inserted at the start of the document, using the numbers you specify, and then an equation number will be inserted at the current location of the insertion point. If you prefer, you can click Cancel and then insert an equation section break at the location you desire. In this case you will have to choose the Insert Equation Number command again. This dialog will not appear once you have inserted an equation section break, or if you have selected an equation number format that does not include a chapter or section number. Check the Always start new documents with chapter 1, section 1 option if you do not wish to see this dialog the first time you insert an equation number into a document. You can also control whether this dialog appears by checking or clearing the Alert when inserting first equation number checkbox in the Format Equation Numbers dialog. See Also Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog Format Equation Number Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Equation Number Dialog


This dialog lets you set the format for new equation numbers or change the format of existing equation numbers.
Number Format

This section lets you specify a number format. The Simple Format option lets you pick the enclosure, separator and format of each part of the number. All parts are optional; use the checkbox next to each part to include/exclude it from the number. The Preview shows you an example using your format. If you want more control over the format you can choose the Advanced Format option, and then enter the desired format in the Format edit box. All characters in the format are used literally, except for the terms #C, #S and #E. These correspond to the Chapter, Section and Equation parts of the number (and can be in any order). Each of these terms must be followed by another character indicating the numeric format; these correspond to the choices in the menus and are as follows: 1 A a I i Numeric Alphabetic alphabetic Roman roman 1, 2, 3 ... A, B, C ... a, b, c ... I, II, III ... i, ii, iii ...

Thus the format (#C1:#S1-#Ei) would generate the number (1:1-i). The Preview updates as you make changes to the format. A useful tip is to use the Simple Format option to get the format as close as possible to the desired format, then choose the Advanced Format option and make the final changes.
Change the equation number format for

Options in this section control which equation numbers are affected by the settings in this dialog. Choose New equation numbers to affect new equation numbers created with the Insert Equation Number command. Choose Current selection or Whole document to update existing equation numbers.
Options

Update equation numbers automatically Whenever you insert an equation number or an equation reference into a document, all of the existing equation numbers and references are updated so that the numbering sequences are correct. Typically this operation doesn't take very long, but if you are running on a slower computer, or you are working on a large document, then this process may start taking a while. If so, you can turn off this option, which prevents the update from automatically taking place. If you turn off automatic updating, you must manually update the numbers using the Update Equation Numbers command. You must also use this command if you move or delete an equation number, as the automatic updating doesn't occur in these situations. Alert when inserting first equation number The first time an equation number is inserted into a document, the document is checked to make sure it contains an initial chapter/section break . If it doesn't, the default behavior is to present a dialog asking for the starting chapter and section numbers. If you uncheck this option, starting values of 1 will be inserted without the dialog appearing. Alert when inserting equation references When an equation reference is inserted into a document, the default behavior is to present a dialog that reminds you to double-click on an equation number to actually insert the reference. If you uncheck this option, this dialog will no longer appear. Use format as default for new documents Check this option if you want to use the current format as the default for all new documents. The first time you insert an equation number into a new document, the format is saved with the document. This means that the default format only affects documents that haven't had equation numbers inserted. See Also Insert Equation Number Dialog Insert Chapter/Section Break Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Equations Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the formatting of all MathType, Equation Editor, and Word EQ field equations in the chosen range. It applies the equation preferences (styles, sizes, spacing) you choose to all equations in the current selection or the entire document. Note that Equation Editor equations and Word EQ fields will be converted to MathType equation objects by this operation. If you do not want this to happen, you must choose a range that omits them. Format equations using preferences from: Use this section to select how you want the equations to look by selecting equation preferences that will be used in the formatting operation. Current document Choose this option if you want to use the current document's equation preferences. This option will only be available if you have set the equation preferences for the document. See the Set Equation Preferences Dialog. MathType's 'New Equation' preferences Choose this option if you want to use the preferences MathType is currently configured to use for new equations. Equation on clipboard Choose this option to reformat the equations to have the same format as an existing equation. In preparation for using this option, copy the equation on which you want to base the formatting to the clipboard . The equation may be in the current document, any other document, or in a MathType equation window. This option will only be available if there is an equation on the clipboard. MathType preference file Choose this option to format the equations based on the equation preferences you have previously saved in a file using the Save to File command on MathType's Equation Preferences menu. Use the Browse button to locate the file. Use for new equations Check this box to use the selected equation preferences for new equations you create in this document. Preview Click this button to view the style, size and spacing definitions you've selected. See the Preview Preferences Dialog. Range These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be formatted: Whole document will format all equations in the document, while Current selection will only format those equations in the current selection.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Convert Equations Dialog


The Convert Equations dialog is used to convert equations in your document between various equation types. This is useful, for example, when you want to convert some or all of the Equation Editor equations in a Word document into MathType equations, or to convert graphic equations into a text-based language, such as TeX or MathML, for which there is a MathType Translator available.
Equation types to convert:

Only the equation types checked in this group will be converted. The equation types that can be converted are: MathType or Equation Editor equations This includes equations created by any version of MathType or Equation Editor. They can be OLE objects, GIF images, or MathType 1.x macros. Microsoft Word EQ fields These are equation fields inserted using Word's Insert Field command. Prior to the introduction of Equation Editor with Word for Windows 2.0, this was the only way to insert mathematical equations into Word documents. MathType translator text equations This is any equation created using a MathType Translator (which creates text-based equation formats such as TeX or MathML). In order for this option to work the equations must contain both MathType and translator information. This information is included by MathType when you turn on the Include translator name in translation and Include MathType data in translation options in MathType's Translators Dialog, and when you turn on the equivalent options in the Convert equations to group in this dialog. Word 2007 (OMML) equations Word 2007 included a new equation editor that utilizes the Office Math Markup Language (OMML). This dialog option converts OMML equations into MathType equations or into text, as selected in the Convert equations to group in this dialog. This feature is not available in all versions of Word.See <link>System Requirements for Converting Word 2007 (OMML) Equations for more information. You must select at least one equation type, or no equations will be converted.
Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document in which equations will be converted: Whole document will convert all equations in the document, while Current selection will only convert those equations in the current selection.
Prompt before converting each equation

Check this option to be prompted before each equation is converted. This gives you an opportunity to skip equations you do not want to convert.
Convert equations to

Options in this section allow you to specify the type of equation to which to convert. MathType equations (OLE objects) This will result in normal MathType graphic equation objects. Text using MathType translator This will result in each equation being converted to plain text using the currently selected translator. The other options in this section allow you to choose the translator and to determine whether MathType's internal data gets included in the translation. If you convert equations to text using one of the translators, and think you might want to convert them to another format in the future, turn on the Include translator name as a comment and Include MathType data as a comment options. See the Translators Dialog for more details.
Convert

Click this button to convert all equations that match the given criteria.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Export Equations Dialog


This dialog allows you to export the MathType (and Equation Editor) equations in your Word document to individual graphics files. This can be useful when importing a Word document into a desktop publishing application.
Export To

You can type in the name and location of the folder in which you want to export the equation files, or you can choose an existing location using the Browse button. If you're continually exporting files to the same folder, it can be useful to have it cleaned out before the export begins. The Delete all files of same type in folder option is provided for this purpose. However, be careful that you've chosen the correct folder or you may delete files that you didn't mean to!
File Format

This section lets you choose a File type , a File name pattern, and the First number with which to begin numbering files. The number gets incremented for each exported equation, and inserted into the filename in place of the # characters in the pattern. For example, with the pattern Eqn### and a starting value of 5, the first EPS file exported will be Eqn005.eps, then Eqn006.eps and so on. Using multiple # characters helps in making all filenames the same minimum length, which causes them to display in the correct sequence when sorted. Select Replace equation with file name to replace each equation with its filename enclosed in double angle brackets, e.g., <<Eqn005.eps>>.
Range

These options allow you to choose the range within the document from which equations will be exported: Whole document will export all equations in the document, while Current selection will only export those equations in the current selection. See Also Exporting Equations Step-by-Step

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Publish to MathPage Dialog


This dialog allows you to convert a Word document to a webpage in which the equations display and print properly. Creating Pages with MathPage contains additional information about this feature. We strongly recommend that you read it first. It explains the process more fully, and contains many tips for creating great webpages.
Document

This section lets you set the Title of the webpage and its File Name . Display in default browser will open the generated page in your default Web browser after the generation process has completed.
Equations

In this section you can choose how equations will be represented in the webpage: either using GIF images or MathML. If you choose Use images (GIFs), a set of GIF files is created for every equation (and some symbols). When the page is viewed in a browser, dynamic HTML is used to select the appropriate image depending on the resolution of the monitor. This makes the size of the equation more closely match the size of the surrounding text. A high-resolution image is used when the page is printed, again making the equation match the rest of the document. You can also choose to use our MathZoom technology, which zooms (magnifies) equations when you click on them, allowing you to see clearly subscripts, superscripts, hats and primes. Equations can also be represented as MathML. MathML is a World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) specified language for expressing mathematics (for more details visit their website at http://www.w3.org/math ). There are several different ways that it can be used, depending upon the browser and/or plug-in that you and your audience are using. When you select MathML using, the dialog contains a list of MathML targets from which you can choose. A page generated for a given MathML target may not display properly when viewed in another browser or without the required plug-in being installed.
Target Browser

In this section, you can choose the target browser (some MathML targets require a specific browser and one of the browser choices may be disabled). Microsoft's Internet Explorer 5 for Windows and newer can display many symbols correctly, while other browsers require GIF images to be used for some symbols. If you're sure the audience for your pages will only be using IE5 and newer for Windows, select this choice as the page will download slightly faster. Otherwise choose the All browsers option. We've tested pages generated with MathPage extensively and have compiled helpful information. You can view a list of known issues with various browsers and other MathPage details by searching through our Technical Notices in the support section of our website.
Use settings as defaults

Select this item to use the selected settings the first time Export to MathPage is used on any documents in the future. If Export to MathPage has already been used on a document, its previous settings will display and not these defaults.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType's Support for Microsoft PowerPoint


In This Chapter Support for Microsoft PowerPoint MathType Menu MathType Toolbar

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Support for Microsoft PowerPoint


MathType 6 has added greater functionality for PowerPoint versions 2000, 2002 and 2003. The new MathType Toolbar added to PowerPoint contains commands for inserting equations, browsing equations and the MathType Menu provides links to MathType's help and website. The MathType commands for Microsoft PowerPoint are stored in a PowerPoint add-in file. There is a separate add-in file for each version of PowerPoint. MathType Setup installs these files into the Office Support folder inside your MathType folder and configures each version of PowerPoint it detects to load these add-ins at startup. If you install a new version of PowerPoint after installing MathType, you should run MathType Setup again to install the commands for this new version. This won't affect any of your MathType settings. If you want to temporarily remove the MathType commands from PowerPoint, choose the Add-Ins command on PowerPoint's Tools menu, select the "MathType AddIn (PowerPoint XX)" item and click the Unload button. The MathType toolbar button will disappear. You can enable the commands by opening this dialog, selecting the same item and clicking the Load button. If you want to permanently remove the commands from PowerPoint, open the Add-Ins dialog, select the "MathType AddIn (PowerPoint XX)" item and click the Remove button. See Also MathType's Support for Microsoft Word MathType Toolbar for PowerPoint MathType Menu for PowerPoint

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Menu
Insert Equation Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation. MathType Help Contents and Index... Opens MathType Help Using MathType in Word... Opens MathType's Help for Microsoft Word Unlock/Register MathType... Gives you information on how to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing. About MathType... Displays MathType's About box showing you: The version of the MathType application you are currently using Copyright information Your product registration information, including your product key if you have unlocked MathType, or the number of days left in the evaluation period if MathType is in evaluation mode MathType on the Web MathType Home Page... Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English). Online Support... Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and information on compatibility with other applications. Send Feedback by Email... Opens your email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report, please visit our online tech support area first. Order MathType... Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products). Future MathType Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Toolbar

Insert Equation Opens a new MathType window ready for you to enter an equation. Browse Equations Browse allows you to search back and forth through the slides for equations.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using MathType with Applications and Websites


In This Chapter Math Anywhere and Everywhere Specific Applications and Web Sites General Techniques

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Math Anywhere and Everywhere


MathType works with many Windows applications. For the most part, if you can imagine putting equations in an application's documents, there is likely to be a way to do it. MathType has powerful, configurable capabilities for interoperability with applications and websites. MathType supports standard formats and technologies such as OLE, MathML and LaTeX. By using custom translators, MathType can be configured to work well with many more specialized formats. MathType comes with pre-configured support for many specific applications and websites. Instructions for a number specific applications and web sites are available in this section. However, we are constantly adding support for new applications. New translators and updated instructions are available on the Design Science web site: Consult MathType Works With... for updates, and information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and web sites. To suggest applications and websites you would like to see us support, contact us by sending email to support@dessci.com . Even if there aren't instructions specifically for you favorite application or web site, there is a good chance you can still use MathType with it. MathType supports most standards for math interoperability between applications. See General Techniques.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Specific Applications and Web Sites


In This Chapter Maple Mathematica Physics Forums WebEQ Wikipedia Checking for Updates

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Maple
Maple is a popular computer algebra system that has the capability of using MathML both for input and output. Consult MathType Works With... for updates, and information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and web sites. Inserting a MathType equation into Maple After you create an equation in the MathType editing window, follow these steps to insert it into your Maple worksheet: 1. Select Translators... from the Preferences menu. 2. Select the translator Maple -- MathML. You do not need to perform this step for every equation. Once you select the appropriate translator, future equations will be translated using this translator until you select a different one. 3. Select the equation or equation fragment you want to insert into Maple, and copy it to the clipboard (Ctrl+C). 4. Paste the equation into a Maple worksheet (Ctrl+V). After pasting the equation, Maple will ask you if you want to convert the equation into 2D math; answer Ye s. The equation may now be used just like any other Maple equation. Inserting a Maple equation into MathType If you have an equation in a Maple worksheet that you want to use in MathType, follow these steps: 1. Select the equation. 2. Right-click the equation, and choose Conversions -> MathML from the contextual menu. 3. Maple will display a MathML string that you can then copy and paste into MathType. The equation may now be edited and used just like any other MathType equation.

Note: When Maple converts the equation into MathML it will first evaluate and simplify it, then display the MathML string for the simplified equation. For example, if the equation is y = 2x + x, Maple will produce the MathML that represents y = 3x, so what you'll see in MathType is y = 3x. Furthermore, if x already had a value of 2, then it would result in the equation y = 6. You can prevent this from happening by converting the equation into an Inert equation in Maple (right-click > 2D Math > Convert to > Inert form) and only then converting it into MathML.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Mathematica
Mathematica is a popular computer algebra system that has the capability of using MathML both for input and output. Consult MathType Works With... for updates, and information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and web sites. Inserting a MathType equation into Mathematica After you create an equation in the MathType editing window, follow these steps to insert it into your Mathematica notebook: 1. Select Translators... from the Preferences menu. 2. Select the translator Mathematica -- MathML. Make sure the two checkboxes Include translator name in translation and Include MathType data in translation are not checked. You do not need to perform this step for every equation. Once you select the appropriate translator, future equations will be translated using this translator until you select a different one. 3. Select the equation or equation fragment you want to insert into Mathematica, and copy it to the clipboard (Ctrl+C). 4. Paste the equation into a Mathematica notebook (Ctrl+V). The equation may now be used just like any other Mathematica equation. Inserting a Mathematica equation into MathType If you have an equation in a Mathematica notebook that you want to use in MathType, follow these steps: 1. Select the equation. 2. Right-click the equation, and choose Copy as -> MathML from the contextual menu. 3. Paste the equation into MathType. The equation may now be edited and used just like any other MathType equation. Tips for Best Results Following the steps above, one can easily cut and paste mathematical expressions between Mathematica and MathType. However, in order to evaluate or symbolically manipulate a MathType expressions in Mathematica, it may be necessary to further edit the expression once you have pasted it into Mathematica. Mathematica uses a number of syntax conventions for mathematical expressions that allow it to maintain an internal representation suitable for calculation. By contrast, MathType is an equation editor, concerned primarily with giving authors an easy way to create nicely styled and well-typeset notations, and doesn't impose any restrictions on the notations created. As a result, it will often be necessary to "fix up" a MathType expression you have pasted into Mathematica to ensure it conforms to Mathematica conventions. There are two areas in particular that are worth highlighting, since they arise frequently: 1. Special Symbols. Mathematica uses three special symbols to eliminate ambiguities from expressions. Specifically, Mathematica uses a special DifferentialD character for the d in a differential (e.g. dx), an ExponentialE character for Euler's constant, and an ImaginaryI character for the square root of -1. Since Mathematica relies on these characters, you will need to edit your expressions to use them as well. Typically, you would do this after pasting into Mathematica, but before evaluation. These characters can be used directly in MathType as well, if you have Mathematica's fonts installed on your system. Use the Edit | Insert Symbol command on the MathType window to open the Insert Symbol dialog. Choose View by Description from the pull down menu at the top, and then click the "New Search" button. Search for "differential" (or "exponential" or "imaginary" as appropriate). The relevant Mathematica characters will appear among the results. Choose the one appropriate for your expression. 2. Explicit Grouping. In many mathematical expressions, the proper grouping of terms is not explicit, and instead relies on the reader's understanding of notational conventions. For calculation, however, underspecified grouping is a common source of errors. Both Mathematica and MathType employ algorithms to infer the proper grouping in underspecified expressions. However, for best results, we recommend adding parentheses to make grouping explicit in the following situations: Add parentheses around function arguments. This is particularly important for trigonometric functions where parenthesis are often omitted in print, e.g. use sin(2x) instead of sin 2x. Add parentheses around integrands, e.g. vs The parentheses should not include the differential.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Physics Forums
Physics Forums is a website for sharing help and discussions on Physics, Mathematics, Science Education, Engineering and other scientific areas (Chemistry, Biology, Computer Sciences, Astronomy, and more.) It uses a version of LaTeX notation to display mathematical formulas. Consult MathType Works With... for updates, and information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and web sites. Inserting a MathType equation into a Physics Forums post After you create an equation in the MathType editing window, follow these steps to insert it into the post you intend to publish in the Physics Forums website: 1. Select Translators... from the Preferences menu. 2. Select the translator Physics Forums -- LaTeX. You do not need to perform this step for every equation. Once you select the appropriate translator, future equations will be translated using this translator until you select a different one. 3. Select the equation or equation fragment you want to insert into the post, and copy it to the clipboard (Ctrl+C). 4. Paste the equation into the post you are editing (Ctrl+V). You can now submit your post, if you are done, or continue editing it. Inserting a Physics Forums equation into MathType If you see an equation in a Physics Forums post that you want to use in MathType, follow these steps: 1. Click on the equation. A new browser window will pop up, with the LaTeX code for the equation between [tex] and [\tex] (or [latex] and [\latex].) 2. Select everything between these two tags, without including them. 3. Copy (Ctrl+C) the selected text to the clipboard. 4. Paste (Ctrl+V) into a MathType window.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

WebEQ
WebEQ Developers Suite is a collection of programs and applets for creating dynamic math in webpages. Since both WebEQ and MathType can use MathML to encode equations, there are many ways in which MathType and the WebEQ tools can work together. Consult MathType Works With... for updates, and information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and web sites. Using MathType with WebEQ Publisher WebEQ Publisher is a tool for producing a ready-to-publish webpage from an HTML file containing raw MathML embedded in it. The Publisher can convert the MathML equations into a variety of formats including images, Viewer Control applet code, and MathML further processed for display. To use MathType with WebEQ Publisher, create a webpage using an HTML editor such as Dreamweaver or FrontPage. When you need an equation, use MathType to cut and paste MathML directly into the HTML editor. To do this, select the MathML 2.0 (no namespace) option in the Translators Dialog in the MathType Preferences menu. Once you have finished your HTML source document, run the WebEQ Publisher to product the final, ready-to-publish webpage. Consult the WebEQ Publisher documentation for complete information about selecting a final output format for the equations. Using MathType with WebEQ Editor WebEQ Editor is a specialized equation editor for working with MathML. It allows authors to directly edit MathML attributes, and gives authors more direct control over the nested MathML structure. It can also be used to directly edit MathML actions into an equation. These features are important for Web developers working to create dynamic math content. To copy from MathType to paste into WebEQ Editor: Select MathML 2.0 (no namespace) from the Translators Dialog in the MathType Preferences menu. Copy your MathType equation to the clipboard, and from there, paste it into WebEQ Editor, where it will be inserted at the current cursor location. To copy from WebEQ Editor to paste into MathType: Use the WebEQ Editor 'MathML Export Preferences' dialogs to choose the MathML format shown here:

Then Copy a selection from the WebEQ Editor, and Paste in MathType. The expression will be inserted at the current cursor location.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Wikipedia
Wikipedia is a popular online encyclopedia to which anyone can contribute. Its English version contains more than 100,000 pages, over 1000 of which contain mathematical equations. For example, here's one on Trigonometry . Wikipedia is a great place to research mathematical and scientific topics and help you prepare your own research, lesson plans, and classroom materials. MathType 6 allows you to copy equations from Wikipedia's pages into its equation editing windows. Similarly, you can paste MathType equations into Wikipedia's editor allowing you to author or edit Wikipedia articles. Using MathType, you can create equations for your Wikipedia articles by selecting the Wikipedia translator in the Translators Dialog in the MathType Preferences menu. Then, copy the equations from MathType and paste into the Wikipedia editor. Importing equations from Wikipedia to MathType is as simple as copying equation images from Wikipedia to MathType. See Copying Equations from Wikipedia to MathType for specific instructions on copying Wikipedia images. Wikipedia is not the only site that you can copy equations from. The following sites contain many images that can be copied into MathType: Planetmath.org Art of Problem Solving Forums Scholarpedia Consult MathType Works With... for updates, and information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and web sites. Copying Equations from Wikipedia into MathType Equations can be copied from Wikipedia, or any website that uses the same MediaWiki format for equations, into MathType. Copying equations works differently from every browser. Here are some tips for copying from Internet Explorer, Firefox and Safari: The easiest way to copy in all three of these browsers is to select the equation, press Ctrl-C to copy and Ctrl-V to paste into MathType. However you can sometimes use the right-click menu or drag-and-drop. See tips for each browser below. Internet Explorer: Select the equation and choose Copy from the right-click menu. To drag-and-drop, select the equation and press Ctrl while dragging. Firefox: Select the equation and choose Copy, not Copy Image, from the right-click menu. To drag-and-drop, select the equation and drag. Safari: Safari's copy options in the right-click menu do not copy the appropriate data to the clipboard. In some cases, you can drag-and-drop by selecting the equation and dragging. Opera does not support copying equations to the clipboard. Pasting Equations from MathType into Wikipedia By default, MathType's Cut and Copy commands place an equation picture on the clipboard. To copy equations in a form that can be recognized by Wikipedia, you must use MathType's Translators dialog (on the Preferences menu) to select the Wikipedia translator from the pull-down list. Once the Wikipedia translator has been set, you can select the MathType equation, copy it and paste the TeX produced by the translator into the Wikipedia editor. When you submit your article, this TeX will be converted by Wikipedia to an image or an HTML equation. See Also: Working With TeX

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Checking for Updates


If you didn't find instructions for using MathType with a particular application or web site: Consult MathType Works With... for updates, and information about using MathType with hundreds of other applications and web sites. We are constantly adding support for new applications and web sites, and instructions for existing applications are updated as new versions are released. We also welcome suggestions for applications and websites you would like to see us support. Contact us by sending email to support@dessci.com . Consult General Techniques. MathType can be used with many applications and web sites for which we do not yet have specific instructions.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

General Techniques
In This Chapter Working With Insert Object Working With MathML Working With TeX Working With Equation Image Files Translators Dialog Translation Issues Creating a New Translator

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working With Insert Object


Insert Object (OLE)
Many Windows applications support Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). Most of them have an Insert Object command (or an Object command on its Insert menu or elsewhere). If your application doesn't have such a command, look up Object Linking and Embedding or OLE in the index of its user documentation. The Insert Object command brings up a dialog containing a list of all the kinds of objects that may be inserted. Simply choose "MathType 6.5 Equation" and MathType will open an equation editing window. Simply create your equation, close the window when you are done, and the new equation will appear in the document. Any time you want to edit the equation, simply double-click on it. If your favorite application does not support OLE, request it from the vendor. Most software vendors like to get feedback from their customers, just like we do.

Copy and Paste (or Drag and Drop)


At its core, a MathType equation is a graphical image (but a WMF vector image, rather than a bitmap one, such as GIF). If your application accepts graphics via the Windows clipboard, you can run MathType from the Windows Start menu, create an equation, and paste it into your application. Your application may also support drag and drop but that gives the same result. When using MathType this way, you don't have to restart it for each new equation. Just leave its editing window open for your entire session. When you need to create a new equation, bring the MathType window to the front, do Select All on the Edit menu (Ctrl-A), hit the Delete key to clear out the last equation, and create your new equation ready to paste. Later, if you need to edit an equation, you can usually use Cut or Copy and Paste it back into a MathType editing window. After you make your edits, just copy paste it over the old one.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working With MathML


Some applications support a standard for using MathML as an exchange format for Copy and Paste (or drag and drop). The type of MathML used is controlled by selecting one of the MathML translators from the Translators Dialog. There may already exist in MathType's list of translators one specifically tailored to your intended target. If not, byy experimenting, you may be able to obtain better results with Copy and Paste. MathML Translators MathType 6 provides output translators for MathML, a recommendation from the World Wide Web Consortium for encoding mathematics for the Web. Because MathML is still young, there are differences in the support for MathML in other software. Therefore, MathType 6 comes with four MathML translators. Three of the translators generate MathML 2.0, packaged in slightly different ways for the various browsers and browser plug-ins and behaviors that support MathML. The fourth translator generates MathML 1.0. The MathML translators provided with MathType 6 are: MathML 2.0 (m namespace) All MathML tags are prefixed with a m: namespace. This style of MathML is used by our MathPlayer behavior for Internet Explorer 6 and newer (Windows only). Pages using this plug-in also require an additional statement linking this namespace to the MathPlayer behavior. See the MathPlayer website for more details. MathML 2.0 (namespace attr) This translator generates MathML 2.0 using a namespace attribute on each <math> tag. MathML 2.0 (no namespace) This translator generates plain MathML tags with no namespace information. Use this translator when creating pages for use with WebEQ, or with any MathML-enabled browser. MathML 1.0 This is provided for compatibility with older software. You probably won't need to use it unless the MathML software you're using doesn't support MathML 2.0. MathML is the Mathematical Markup Language approved by the W3C for use as a medium for communicating math on the World Wide Web. Although MathML is a W3C standard, MathML support is still in its early stages. However, with the release of MathPlayer for Internet Explorer 5.5 and newer, and Netscape 7.0 and Mozilla 1.0, both of which support MathML natively, the future of MathML looks brighter than ever. To keep up-to-date on MathML support, visit the Math Working Group's page at www.w3.org . One popular solution to displaying MathML in modern browsers is WebEQ, a Java browser plug-in that displays MathML. See Using MathType with WebEQ for details. See Also Publishing to MathPage Step by Step W3C MathML Website

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working With TeX


Many web application that use math represent equations using the TeX typesetting language, because it is easy to type in web forms. However, since there are many dialects and variations of TeX, you will need to choose a compatible MathType translator to use when pasting into such a web application. There may already exist in MathType's list of translators one specifically tailored to your intended target. If not, by experimenting with different TeX translators from the Translators Dialog you may be able to improve the results of Copy and Paste. Because they only use a basic subset of TeX, the Texvc translators are often good choices. TeX Translators TeX is a typesetting language invented in the late 1970's by Donald Knuth, a Stanford computer science professor. Although it is a very powerful document processor, especially for documents containing equations, it is also difficult to use. You can think of TeX as a sort of programming language for documents. If you don't get the syntax just right, you get "syntax error" instead of a document. Here is an example of the TeX language for the quadratic formula (generated by MathType's AMS LaTeX translator): \[ \frac{{ - b\pm \sqrt {b^2 - 4ac}}}{{2a}} \] If you work with TeX, MathType's TeX translators can help you. There are several 'flavors' of TeX, LaTeX being one of the most well-known. MathType includes translators for several of these different versions, check the list in the Translators Dialog for the complete list.

Translating Display and Inline Equations


When an equation appears in a document, it can be displayed inline with surrounding text, or it may be centered in a paragraph by itself. Users of MathType in Microsoft Word will already be familiar with this concept, since MathType's commands for Word use different commands to insert inline and display equations. TeX also has a notation of inline and display equations, but it works differently. Since TeX is a programming language, the positioning of the equation in document must be specified in the TeX code for the equation. TeX uses special delimiter characters at the beginning and end of an equation to indicate whether it should be an inline or display equation. Different flavors of TeX use different delimiter characters, but the most common are $...$ for an inline equation and \[...\] for a display equation. You can control which kind of TeX delimiter will be used when translating a MathType equation. Checking the "Inline Equation" property from MathType's Format menu will cause inline delimiters to be used for translation. Otherwise display delimiters will be used. When using MathType with Microsoft Word, the Inline Equation property is automatically set when inserting equations via MathType's commands for Word. However, if you later move an equation within your document, you may need to manually update the Inline Equation property for TeX export, or for MathType 6.5's new TeX Toggle feature in Word.

Importing TeX Equations


While MathType's TeX translators provide and easy way to export an equation as TeX code, MathType also provides several ways to import a TeX equation. MathType imports Texvc, subset of TeX supported by Wikipedia. See the help topic Displaying a formula handbook for an explanation of this language. You can type Texvc directly into MathType. See Using TeX Language Input for details. If you use Microsoft Word, you can type Texvc directly into the Word editing area, and toggle back and forth between the Texvc view and the MathType view of the equation. See the TeX Toggle help for details. You can import and export Texvc from Wikipedia and other web sites using cut and paste. More information about this feature can be found in Using MathType with Wikipedia. See Also Translators Translators Dialog Format menu Typing TeX Directly Into Word 2007 (TeX Toggle) Typing TeX Directly Into Word Pre-2007 (TeX Toggle) Using MathType with Wikipedia. in the MediaWiki

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Working With Equation Image Files


MathType can also save equations in several graphics formats. For working with desktop publishing applications, Encapsulated PostScript format (EPS) is handy. For putting equations on web pages or working with web-based applications, the GIF format is best. Check with your application's documentation on how to work with graphics files. When you need to edit an equation, use MathType's Open command on the File menu to open the file. Once you have made your edits, close the window and save changes when asked. See Also Working With Files

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Translators Dialog
This dialog allows you to specify what kind of information will be placed on the clipboard whenever you use the Cut or Copy commands on the Edit menu. Normally, Cut or Copy will place a graphic image of the selected part of the equation onto the clipboard, ready to be pasted into a document. However, using the options in this dialog, you can have the selected equation or fragment be translated into text on the clipboard in one of the computer languages for which a translator is available. See Translators for information on the translators that are installed with MathType.

Equation object (Windows OLE Graphic)


Click this option to place an OLE equation object on the clipboard. This is the default and is normally used to transfer equation material between one MathType window and another, or between a MathType window and another application, such as a word processor. When you paste an equation into another application's window, how it is handled depends on that application. If the application is OLE-compatible, it will be treated as a new OLE object. If the application is not EGO- or OLE-compatible, it will be treated as a graphic image.

Translation to other language (text):


MathType is supplied with several translators that allow equations to be translated into several mathematical computer languages such as TeX and MathML. Click this option to cause MathType to translate the selected equation whenever you use the Cut or Copy command. The information placed on the clipboard will be plain text in the language selected in the Translator list. Translator Use this listbox to choose from one of the translators currently available to MathType. The text of each list item describes the computer language (or variant) that the translator can translate equations into. The Description item shows a longer description of the translator and the File item shows the filename of the translator itself. Beside the translators that are installed as part of the MathType product, there may be other translators available. Also, it is possible to create your own translator or modify an existing one. See Translators for information on the translators that are installed with MathType. Check the support section of our website for news regarding other translators that may be available and information on creating or modifying translators. Include translator name in translation This option instructs the translator software to place the name of the translator in the translation. This is used by MathType's support for Microsoft Word to allow its Convert Equations command to find the equations in the document. If you are using MathType with a TeX application instead of Word, you should leave this option unchecked. Some translators may ignore this option. Include MathType data in translation This option instructs the translator software to place MathType's equation representation in the translation. This allows the equation to be pasted back into MathType for later editing and should normally be checked. Some translators may ignore this option. See Also Working With MathML Working With TeX

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Translation Issues
Most equation data gets translated appropriately. Some equation data may not have a corresponding construct in some languages, however this is obviously translator-dependent. Still, there are a few equation features and attributes that are not currently translatable: Nudging Color Actual positions of characters, templates, etc. Dimensions entered in the Define Spacing dialog on the Format menu Some matrix options; equal rows, equal columns, row alignment Fence alignment options Tab-stop type and position

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Creating a New Translator


You can create a new translator by modifying an existing translator or from scratch. Either way, you will have to understand the Translator Definition Language (TDL), the language used to define translators. TDL is described in detail in the MathType Translator Programmers Manual, part of the MathType Software Development Kit available on the MathType website. It is our hope that you and other MathType users will use this information to create translators for other languages and applications and make them available to the MathType community. We are constantly expanding support for using MathType with other applications and web sites. Visit the support section of our website for the latest listing of available translators. Contact Design Science at support@dessci.com support section of our website . for information on creating a new translator or visit the

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Reference
In This Chapter MathType Installation MathType's command line options Windows Start Menu Menus Dialogs Keyboard shortcuts Toolbars

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Installation
In This Chapter Installing MathType Installing Unlocked or in Evaluation Mode MathType Setup Dialog Installing over an older version Removing the application Moving MathType to a different folder Using Equation Conversion Manager Checking For the Latest Version Windows Start Menu Obtaining OMML to MathML Conversion Stylesheets

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Installing MathType
To install MathType, exit MathType, Microsoft Word, PowerPoint and Outlook. Then simply run the MathType Setup Program: If you received MathType on a CD-ROM, Windows will usually run Setup automatically when you insert the CD. If it doesn't, just use the Run command to run SETUP.EXE in the MathType folder of the CD. If you downloaded MathType electronically, run the self-extracting executable that you saved on your hard disk. Any temporary files will be automatically deleted when Setup is finished. To complete the installation, just follow the instructions in Setup's dialogs. See Also MathType Setup Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Installing Unlocked or in Evaluation Mode


When you install MathType, you can either install it unlocked or in a 30-day evaluation mode. You must have a valid product key to unlock MathType. If you purchased MathType on CD, the product key is on the Getting Started with MathType 6 documentation inside the MathType box. If you bought MathType online and downloaded it, the product key is on the payment confirmation webpage and also in the order confirmation email you received. Once you've obtained a product key, enter your information. In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing, register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box that allows the installer to send your information to Design Science is selected. Click OK. If you don't have a product key, you can evaluate MathType by choosing the Evaluate MathType for 30 days option during installation. The full version of MathType will be installed, and you will enjoy the same functionality as the unlocked version. Towards the end of the evaluation period you'll start receiving messages when you start MathType informing you how much of the evaluation period remains. You can unlock MathType at any time with a valid product key, without reinstalling. Choose the Unlock/Register MathType command on MathType's Help menu and enter the product key into the dialog that opens. Once the evaluation period has expired, MathType starts running in MathType Lite mode. This provides a level of functionality similar to our Equation Editor product. An added bonus is that MathType Lite is better for collaboration with MathType users than Equation Editor. See Collaborating with Equation Editor Users for more information. See Also Purchasing a Product key and Unlocking MathType Equation Editor, Evaluating MathType, and Lite Mode

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType Setup Dialog


This dialog allows you to either install MathType or remove an existing MathType installation. If you're installing for the first time the Remove button will be disabled. Install Click this option to install MathType to the folder shown in the Destination Folder box. Destination Folder Use this area to change the folder on your hard disk where Setup will install most of MathType's files. Use the Browse button to navigate to a folder. Setup will also install fonts and system files into appropriate system folders on your hard disk. Click OK to begin the installation process. Click Exit to terminate Setup and abort the installation. Remove Click this option to remove MathType from the folder shown in the Remove MathType from box. Remove MathType from Use this box to choose which folder on your hard disk Setup will remove MathType from. Use the Browse button to navigate to a folder. Details on the files installed by Setup are included in the MathType Administrator's Kit available in the support section of the Design Science website . Click OK to begin the removal process. Click Exit to close Setup and abort the removal.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Installing over an older version


MathType 5 and MathType 6 cannot be installed simultaneously, and MathType 6's installation process removes MathType 5. You'll still be able to exchange documents containing MathType 5 equations as the equations are fully compatible. If you're currently using an earlier version (3.x or before) you have the option of overwriting it or installing MathType 6 into another folder. The decision as to whether or not to replace your old version of MathType with a new one is one you should consider carefully.

Overwriting an old version of MathType


If you choose to overwrite the older version of MathType, any equations you created with the old version will be automatically updated to the new version of MathType whenever you edit them. Normally, this is what you want as it lets you use the features of the new version of MathType when editing your equations. If you send documents containing equations to your friends and associates, converting equations to the new version is not a problem unless: They need to edit the equations (viewing and printing are not a problem), and They do not have the new version of MathType and are not willing to upgrade. If both of the above are true, leave the old version of MathType installed. This way, when you edit old equations the old version of MathType will be invoked. When you create new equations, you will have your choice of using the old or new version of MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Removing the application


To remove MathType, do one of the following: Choose Remove MathType from the MathType 6 sub-menu of the Windows Start menu or, Choose Control Panel from the Windows Start menu, double-click Add/Remove Programs, choose MathType 6 from the list of removable applications. This will run MathType Setup with the Remove option pre-selected. Follow the instructions presented in Setup's dialogs.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Moving MathType to a different folder


If you decide to move MathType and its components to a different folder on your hard disk, DO NOT just move the files using the Windows Explorer. This will not properly update MathType and the OLE entries in the Windows Registry and MathType will not work properly. We recommend removing MathType and then re-installing it in the new location. See Also Removing MathType Installing MathType

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using Equation Conversion Manager


You can use the Equation Conversion Manager to control the kinds of equations for which MathType will be the designated editor. For example, once you have installed MathType, double-clicking on an equation you created using the Equation Editor that came with Microsoft Word or Office will automatically convert it to a MathType equation. If you don't like this, Equation Conversion Manager is the tool you use to change it. Running the Equation Conversion Manager To run the Equation Conversion Manager, simply choose it from the MathType 6 sub-menu of the Windows Start menu. A dialog will be displayed with two lists of equation types: The left list contains equation types that will be converted to MathType equations when you double-click on them. The right list contains equation types that will not be converted, but will be edited using the equation editing application that was used to create them. Use the two Move buttons in between the lists to move selected equation types from one list to the other. Show equation types for This part of the dialog allows you to show just those equation types for which the editor is installed (installed editors only) or show all equation types even for those that are part of products you do not own (all MathType-compatible editors). The latter choice allows you to decide which editor is used for equations contained in a document that an associate might give to you. Details Click this button to see details of each equation editor's OLE registration. This is information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems. MathType 6 Details Click this button to see details of MathType's OLE registration. This is information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Checking For the Latest Version


MathType supports both automatic and manual checking to find out if a newer version of MathType is available. The checks access the latest MathType version information via your Internet connection. After checking the version, a dialog will be displayed letting you know the results of the comparison. MathType will normally perform this check once a month. If you want to check more often, manually choose the Check for Latest Version Now command on the same menu whenever you want to check for a newer version. If there isn't a newer version of MathType available, the version check may occasionally display information about other Design Science products that have been released. If you'd prefer not to see these, either click the Don't show me this again checkbox in the message, or uncheck the Show Tips command on the MathType on the Web sub-menu of the Help menu.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Windows Start Menu


When MathType is installed, a MathType 6 sub-menu is added to the Windows Start menu. It contains the following items: MathType Runs the MathType application. MathType Server Runs the MathType application in server mode. See Server Dialog. Remove MathType Removes the MathType application and supporting files from your computer. See Removing MathType. Equation Conversion Manager Controls the kinds of equations for which MathType will be the designated editor. See Equation Conversion Manager. MathType Help Opens this help file at its Table of Contents.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Obtaining OMML to MathML Conversion Stylesheets


MathType 6.5 for Windows introduces the ability to convert OMML equations to MathType equations. The software requirements for converting OMML Equations in Microsoft Word are: Microsoft Office Word 2007, or Word 2003 with SP3 The beta version or later of omml2mml.xsl To open Microsoft Word 2007 docx files in earlier versions of Word, you'll need the Microsoft Office File Converter Pack.

How to get omml2mml.xsl


1. Navigate to Microsoft Connect . 2. In the Were you invited to join Connect box, enter this code: 0707-84P4-DPWT. 3. Either sign in using an existing Microsoft account you may have, or create a new one by clicking on Sign Up Now . 4. After you've created your account (if needed) and signed in, navigate to this location: https://connect.microsoft.com/site/sitehome.aspx?SiteID=641 . 5. Click the Downloads link on the left side of the page. 6. Click the Office Word 2007 MathML Transforms Beta link. 7. Click the Download link next to OfficeWord2007MathMLTransforms.zip. 8. This should initiate the download. Save the file to your hard drive. 9. Open the downloaded zip file and read the InstallationInstructions.txt file to complete the install.

How to get the File Converter Pack


Download the Office File Converter Pack Installer from Microsoft.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType's command line options


The MathType command line can consist of a mixture of options and equation files to be opened. If the file name contains special characters (e.g. spaces), enclose it in double-quotation marks. If the file is a MathType preference file, it will be used to set the new equation preferences. See Defaults for New Equations. The following are valid command line options (options can be preceded with either - or /):

-defaults
This will cause MathType to delete all preferences and then terminate immediately. This will have the effect of restoring all of MathType's Factory Settings . Please use this with caution!

-new
Normally, if you include files to be opened on the command line, MathType will not start with an open, untitled, empty equation window. Use this option to force one to be opened. See the New command on the File menu.

-server
This causes MathType to start in server mode. See Server Dialog.

-regserver
This causes MathType to re-register itself with OLE and then terminate immediately. This can be used to clear up some kinds of OLE problems.

-unregserver
This causes MathType to remove its OLE registration and then terminate immediately.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Windows Start Menu


When MathType is installed, a MathType 6 sub-menu is added to the Windows Start menu. It contains the following items: MathType Runs the MathType application. MathType Server Runs the MathType application in server mode. See Server Dialog. Remove MathType Removes the MathType application and supporting files from your computer. See Removing MathType. Equation Conversion Manager Controls the kinds of equations for which MathType will be the designated editor. See Equation Conversion Manager. MathType Help Opens this help file at its Table of Contents.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Menus
In This Chapter File menu Edit menu View menu Zoom Sub-menu Format menu Color Sub-menu Matrix Sub-menu Style menu Size menu Preferences Menu Equation Preferences Sub-menu Help menu MathType on the Web sub-menu

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

File menu
New Ctrl+N Opens a new, empty, equation window so that you can work in it. This window will be untitled until you give it a name when you save it as a file using the Save or Save As commands on this menu. You can also use an untitled window as a scratchpad for equations to be added to the toolbar or copied via the clipboard or drag-and-drop into other equation windows or documents. Open... Ctrl+O Opens an existing MathType equation file from disk, and displays it in a new window. When you choose the Open command, MathType displays the standard Open dialog box, which lets you change volumes drives and folders directories until you find the file you need, and then open it either by double-clicking or by clicking Open. If you worked on a MathType file recently, you can open it quickly by choosing its name from the bottom of the File menu. Close Ctrl+F4 Close and return to Closes the equation window. If you have made changes to the equation in this window, a dialog box will appear asking you if you want to save these changes. You can also close a window by clicking the Close Box in the upper-right corner of the window. If the current MathType window contains an equation that is embedded in a document via OLE , the name of the or document is indicated in the command title. When you choose this command, the contents of the current window are inserted into your document, replacing any previous version of the equation. The 'Save Changes' dialog box will appear unless the "Don't show Save Changes dialog" option has been turned on in the Object Editing Preferences Dialog. Save Ctrl+S Saves the current version of the equation that you're working on. If your equation is untitled, a Save As Dialog will appear so that you can choose a name for it. Once an equation has been named and saved on disk, using the Save command again will replace the previous version with the new one. If you want to keep the previous version in addition to the new one, use the Save As command described below. Update Ctrl+S

This command is displayed in place of the Save command when the MathType window in which you're working contains an equation that's embedded in a document via OLE . When you choose the Update command, the contents of the MathType window are inserted into your document, replacing any previous version of the equation. It is usually not necessary to choose the Update command to save your equation, because you will be asked if you want to save the equation when you close the window. Save As... Preserves the current version of the equation that you're working on by saving it on disk. Use the Save As command, rather than the Save command, when you want to save an untitled equation, or when you want to save an equation under a new name, in a different folder directory , or in a different file format. If you choose the Save As command from a window containing an equation that's embedded in a document via OLE , a copy of the embedded equation will be saved in a file separate from the document, ending the OLE session and leaving the document unchanged. Print Ctrl+P Prints the equations contained in the currently active MathType window. Exit A lt+F4 Terminates the MathType (or MathType Server) application. If you have made changes to equations in any open MathType windows, you will be asked if you want to save those changes for each window that has been modified. Most-recently-used files Up to four MathType equation files that you recently worked on are listed at the bottom of the File menu. You can re-open any of these files just by choosing its name from this menu. This is simply a convenient way to open a file, saving you the step of locating the file on disk. You can explicitly remove a file name from the menu by holding down the Alt key as you choose the file name from the menu. Removing a file name will not have any effect on the file itself.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Edit menu
Undo command Ctrl+Z Reverses the changes from the last command as shown in the text of the menu item. Every command can be undone, back to the point at which the window was opened. This item will be grayed out and will display Can't Undo when there are no more commands to be undone. Redo command Ctrl+Y Re-applies the most recent undo command. Every Undone command can be redone. If there are no commands to be redone, this will display as Can't Redo. Cut Ctrl+X Copies the current selection to the clipboard , and deletes it from the equation. The type of data placed on the clipboard is determined by the Translators Dialog. Copy Ctrl+C Copies whatever is currently selected to the clipboard . The type of data placed on the clipboard is determined by the Translators Dialog. Paste Ctrl+V Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the equation at the insertion point, or replaces whatever is selected with the contents of the clipboard. For this command to be successful, the clipboard must contain a MathType equation, a Microsoft Equation Editor equation, a Microsoft Word "formula field" equation (created using Word's formula typesetting commands), or the translated text generated by one of MathType's translators, with MathType equation data included. Clear Removes whatever is currently selected from the equation. The items removed are not transferred to the clipboard , so this command does not affect the contents of the Clipboard. The effect is the same as if you had pressed the Backspace or Delete key. Insert Symbol Brings up the Insert Symbol dialog, allowing you to insert symbols from any font on your computer, add symbols to the toolbar, or assign keyboard shortcuts to symbols. Select A ll Ctrl+A Selects the entire equation, even if the equation is too large to fit into the window. This command is useful for subsequently copying the equation to the clipboard for transfer to a word processing document, or before using the Backspace or Delete keys to delete the entire contents of the equation window.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

View menu
Zoom This item displays the Zoom Sub-menu which allows you to change the viewing scale. Show All Ctrl+Shift+Y This command toggles the display of certain special symbols in MathType equations. These symbols include tab characters, explicitly entered spaces, and alignment marks. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that these special symbols are currently displayed. The special symbols will not be printed or appear in equations that you have inserted into documents. Show Nesting Ctrl+Shift+N This command toggles the equation display between normal viewing mode and nesting mode, where the background of each equation slot is displayed in gray and has a recessed "3-D" look. This mode is useful in that it allows you to more easily see the hierarchical structure of your equations. The gray slot backgrounds will not be printed or appear in equations that you have inserted into documents. Symbol Palettes Ctrl+Alt+K This command toggles the display of the Symbol Palettes row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Symbol Palettes are currently displayed. See Toolbars for information on using the Symbol Palettes. Template Palettes Ctrl+Alt+T This command toggles the display of the Template Palettes row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Template Palettes are currently displayed. See Toolbars for information on using the Template Palettes. Small Bar Ctrl+A lt+F This command toggles the display of the Small Bar row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Small Bar is currently displayed. See Toolbars for information on using the Small Bar. Large Tabbed Bar Ctrl+Alt+L This command toggles the display of the Large Tabbed Bar row of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Large Tabbed Bar is currently displayed. See Toolbars for information on using the Large Tabbed Bar. Small Tabbed Bar Ctrl+Alt+S This command toggles the display of the Small Tabbed Bar tow of the toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the Small Tabbed Bar is currently displayed. See Toolbars for information on using the Small Tabbed Bar. Toolbar Ctrl+Alt+B This command toggles the display of the entire toolbar. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that toolbar is currently displayed. See Toolbars for more information. Ruler Ctrl+Alt+R This command toggles the display of the ruler. A checkmark next to this menu item indicates that the ruler is currently displayed. (Open Windows) The titles of all open equation windows are listed at the bottom of the View menu. You can bring any of these windows to the front just by choosing its name from this menu or clicking on its name in the Windows Task Bar.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Zoom Sub-menu
100% Ctrl+1 200% Ctrl+2 400% Ctrl+4 800% Ctrl+8 Other These commands change the scale at which you are viewing the equation. The percentages are relative to the size of the equation when inserted into a document or printed. Working at 400% or 800% is handy for making fine adjustments using Nudging. Use the Other command to bring up the Zoom Dialog to select a viewing scale other than 100, 200, 400, or 800%.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format menu
Align Align Align Align Align Left Ctrl+Shift+L Center Ctrl+Shift+J Right Ctrl+Shift+R at = at .

Moves lines in a pile horizontally so that the desired alignment is achieved. Align at = actually will align at any relational operator. Align at Top Positions the pile or matrix containing the insertion point so that its top line aligns with the line containing it. Example:

Align at Center Positions the pile or matrix containing the insertion point or selected so that its middle line (or its vertical center if it contains an even number of lines) aligns with the line containing it. Examples:

Align at Bottom Positions the pile or matrix containing the insertion point or selected so that its bottom line aligns with the line containing it. Example:

Color Displays the Color Sub-menu, which allows you to change the current color or to define new colors. Line Spacing Displays the Line Spacing Dialog allowing you to specify the distance between lines in a pile. Matrix Displays the Matrix Sub-menu allowing you to modify a matrix. To make this command available, either select a matrix or place the insertion point in one of its elements. Fence A lignment Brings up the Fence Alignment Dialog, allowing you to modify how a fence template aligns vertically with the line that contains it. To affect a specific fence template, either select a fence template or place the insertion point inside of a fence template. Inline Equation This command toggles the "inline" property of the equation. When this item is checked, it means the equation is to be placed in a line of text. If it is not checked, the equation is to have its own paragraph in the document (called a "display" equation). Currently, this has no affect on an equation placed in a document as an OLE graphic object, but may affect how the equation is translated (e.g. to TeX), depending on the particular translator used. Reset Nudge

This command removes any nudging that may have been applied to the current selection. Define Spacing Brings up the Define Spacing dialog, allowing you to set various equation dimensions (e.g. fraction bar thickness) for the entire equation or for new equations.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Color Sub-menu
The commands on this sub-menu of the Format menu allow you to color all or part of your equation. Right after installing MathType, this menu will contain the basic colors of Black, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. You can add your own colors to this menu using the Edit Color Menu Dialog. MathType will also add any colors that are being used in the currently open equation window. Use the Other Color Dialog to use a new color without adding it permanently to the menu. (Color items) The colors shown here consist of: Basic colors (e.g., Black, Red, etc.) Colors you have added to the menu using the Edit Color Menu Dialog Additional colors used in open equation windows The default equation color, if it is not one of the above A bullet next to the color indicates the current color (used for characters you are about to enter) or the color of the current selection (if it is all one color). This color is also shown in the Color area of the Status Bar. Choosing a color from the menu sets the color of the current selection and for subsequently entered items. Other This command displays the Other Color Dialog allowing you to choose a color without adding it permanently to the menu. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking the Color area of the Status Bar. Edit Color Menu This command displays the Edit Color Menu Dialog allowing you to add or remove menu colors, name colors, and define advanced color properties for use with professional publishing applications like Quark XPress and Adobe PageMaker or InDesign.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Matrix Sub-menu
The commands on this sub-menu of the Format menu allow you to modify an existing matrix. Add Row Above Ctrl+M,A Inserts a row above the row containing the insertion point or selection. Add Row Below Ctrl+M,B Inserts a row below the row containing the insertion point or selection. Add Column to Left Ctrl+M,L Inserts a column to the left of the column containing the insertion point or selection. Add Column to Right Ctrl+M,R Inserts a column to the right of the column containing the insertion point or selection. Delete Row Ctrl+M,D Deletes the row containing the insertion point or selection. Delete Column Ctrl+M,Shift+D Deletes the column containing the insertion point or selection. Change Matrix Brings up the Matrix Dialog allowing you to modify the matrix.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Style menu
The commands on this menu assign a style to the selected part of the equation or subsequently typed characters. The current style or the style of the selection (if it is all of one style) is shown in the status bar. Math Ctrl+Plus The Math style is the default style for typing mathematics. When the current style is Math, MathType assigns the Variable , Function, Number, or Symbol style automatically based on what you type. IfMathType recognizes a sequence of alphabetic characters as a standard abbreviation for a mathematical function (e.g. sin for the sine trigonometric function), it will use the Function style. All other alphabetic characters are assigned the Variable style. Text Ctrl+Shift+E Use the Text style when you want to type a sentence or phrase in English (or other natural language) instead of in math. When in Text style, the spacebar will be enabled to allow you to enter spaces between words. Function Ctrl+Shift+F Use this command to create a function that was not automatically given the Function style. (See also the Functions Recognized Dialog.) Variable Ctrl+Shift+V Use this command to assign the Variable style to characters that would otherwise be given a different style. For example, sin is a function name that MathType will automatically assign the Function style. You would use this command if you actually wanted to enter three adjacent variables, "s", "i", and "n". Greek- Symbol Ctrl+Shift+G This command allows you to use the keyboard to type Greek letters. Once this style is active, the letters you type will be given either the L.C. Greek or U.C. Greek style, depending on whether you type a lower-case (small) or upper-case (capital) letter. Often it is easier to enter a single Greek letter by using the Ctrl+G One-shot Keyboard Shortcut or by using the Greek symbol palette. This avoids having to switch into Greek style and back again, because the one-shot only affects the very next keystroke. Vector- Matrix Ctrl+Shift+B Mathematical vectors and matrices are sometimes given a bold character style. Use this command to assign the Vector- Matrix style to selected text or subsequently typed characters. Often it is easier to enter a matrix or vector by using the Ctrl+B One-shot Keyboard Shortcut . This avoids having to switch into Vector-Matrix style and back again. User 1 Ctrl+Shift+U User 2 Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U The User 1 and User 2 styles may be used any way you like. Use the Define Styles Dialog to assign a font and character style to each. These styles are used most often to enter characters from alternate alphabets, such as Blackboard Bold (double-stroked) or Fraktur (Old German) . Other This command brings up the Other Style dialog, allowing you to assign a specific font and character style to selected text or subsequently typed characters. Define This command brings up the Define Styles dialog, allowing you to change the font and character style assigned to each style for the entire equation or for new equations. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking on the Style area of the status bar.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Size menu
The commands on this menu assign a typesize or an explicit point size to the current selection or subsequently typed characters. The current size or the size of the selection (if it is all of one size) is shown in the Status Bar. Full Assigns the Full typesize either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently. Subscript Assigns the Subscript typesize either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently. Sub-subscript Assigns the Sub-subscript typesize either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently. Symbol Assigns the Symbol typesize either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently. Sub-symbol Assigns the Sub-symbol typesize either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently. User 1 Assigns the User 1 typesize either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently. User 2 Assigns the User 2 typesize either to selected characters or to characters that you type subsequently. Other Brings up the Other Size Dialog in which you can enter a specific font size in points. Smaller Ctrl+Shift+< Decreases the size of selected characters by 1 point (this increment can be changed in the Define Sizes Dialog). Larger CommandCtrl+Shift+> Increases the size of selected characters by 1 point (this increment can be changed in the Define Sizes Dialog). Reset Smaller/Larger Resets the size of selected characters to their original size. Undoes the effect of using the Smaller or Larger commands. Define This command brings up the Define Sizes Dialog, allowing you to change the specific point size assigned to each typesize for the entire equation or for new equations. You can also invoke this command by double-clicking on the Size area of the Status Bar.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Preferences Menu
The commands on this menu allow you to change MathType's preferences. These are settings which affect how MathType works for all equations. Translators This command displays the Translators Dialog, allowing you to translate equations into other mathematical languages. Web and GIF Preferences This command displays the Web and GIF Preferences Dialog, allowing you to change settings that affect GIF equation files you create and to define an HTML text fragment that will be copied to the clipboard every time you save a GIF file. Functions Recognized This command displays the Functions Recognized Dialog, allowing you to add or remove functions (e.g., sin, cos) that MathType automatically recognizes as you type. Workspace Preferences This command displays the Workspace Preferences Dialog, allowing you to change settings that affect MathType's working environment. Customize Keyboard This command displays the Customize Keyboard Dialog, allowing you to add, modify, and delete your keyboard shortcuts. Object Editing Preferences This command displays the Object Editing Preferences Dialog, allowing you to modify settings that control how MathType works with other OLE -compatible applications (e.g., Microsoft Word and all other word processors). Equation Preferences Displays the Equation Preferences Sub-menu to allow you to load and save equation preferences. (Most-recently-used preference files) Up to four MathType equation preference files that you recently used are listed at the bottom of the Preferences menu. By choosing its name from the menu, the equation preferences contained in the file will be used both for the current equation and for new equations. This is simply a convenient way to load equation preferences from a file you saved using the Save Equation Preference Dialog, without having to locate the file on disk. See New Equation Preferences. If you hold down the Shift key while choosing a file, only the current equation's preferences will be affected. The defaults for new equations will not be changed. This is equivalent to unchecking the Use for new equations option in the Load Equation Preferences dialog. You can explicitly remove a file name from the menu by holding down the Alt key as you choose the file name from the menu. Removing a file name will not have any effect on the file itself.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Equation Preferences Sub-menu


This sub-menu contains commands for saving and loading equation preference files containing size, style, and spacing settings. Load from Default Settings This command sets the equation preferences of the current equation to the factory settings . It does not affect the New Equation Preferences. Load from Preferences for New Equations This command sets the equation preferences of the current equation to new equation preferences . Load from File This command displays the Load Equation Preferences Dialog allowing you to load the equation preferences (sizes, styles, and spacing) from a file you saved previously using the Save to File command on this menu. Save to Preferences for New Equations This command sets the new equation preferences to the equation preferences of the current equation. Save to File This command displays the Save Equation Preferences Dialog allowing you to save the equation preferences (sizes, styles, and spacing) of the current equation into a file. You can load an equation preferences file later using the Load from File command on this menu.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Help menu
This menu contains commands that include bringing up MathType's online help, sending your Web browser directly to the MathType web site, and unlocking and registering MathType. Table of Contents F1 Opens MathType's online help. Tutorials Opens the Tutorials chapter in MathType's help. MathType on the Web The MathType on the Web Sub-menu contains commands for sending your Web browser directly to the MathType Web site. Unlock/Register MathType This command opens a dialog that allows you to enter your product key to unlock MathType as well as register your product so you can receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing. About MathType This command displays MathType's About box showing you: The version of the MathType application you are currently using; Your product registration info, including your product key if you have unlocked MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType on the Web sub-menu


MathType Home Page Opens the MathType home page (e.g. http://www.dessci.com/en for English). Online Support Opens the tech support area of the MathType Web site, where we have many tips and tech support notices that will give you help solving problems and information on compatibility with other applications. Send Feedback Opens your default email program so that you can send feedback to Design Science regarding your experiences with MathType or to request future enhancements. If you have a problem using MathType or a bug to report, please visit our online tech support area first. Order MathType Opens the e-commerce area of the Design Science Web site where you can purchase MathType (or any of our other products). Check for Latest Version Now Access MathType version information via the Internet. See Checking For the Latest Version. Automatic Version Checking Leave this checked if you want MathType to automatically check for newer versions via the Internet about once a month. For more details see Checking For the Latest Version. Show Tips Leave this checked if you'd like, during version checks, to occasionally be informed about other Design Science product releases or product tips. Future MathType Opens a page on our website that will allow you to give us your ideas for future enhancements of MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Dialogs
In This Chapter Customize Keyboard Dialog Define Sizes Dialog Define Spacing Dialog Define Styles Dialog Edit / New Color Dialog Edit Color Menu Dialog Using Equation Conversion Manager Expression Properties Dialog Fence Alignment Dialog Functions Recognized Dialog Insert Symbol Dialog Insert Symbol Search Dialog Line Spacing Dialog Load Equation Preferences Dialog Load Equation Preferences from Factory Settings Dialog Load Equation Preferences from File Dialog Matrix Dialog Object Editing Preferences Dialog Other Size Dialog Other Style Dialog Save As Dialog Save Equation Preferences Dialog Server Dialog Tab Properties Dialog Translators Dialog Unlock/Register MathType Dialog Web and GIF Preferences Dialog Workspace Preferences Dialog Zoom Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Customize Keyboard Dialog


This dialog allows you to review, assign, and remove keyboard shortcuts for all MathType commands, symbols, and templates. Characters that were recently inserted using the Insert Symbol Dialog and characters that currently have shortcuts assigned to them are also shown here. Use the Insert Symbol dialog to assign keyboard shortcuts to other characters. Command This pane shows all of MathType's commands, symbols, and templates organized in a tree hierarchy. Click on each item in the tree to see the item's description shown in the Description box. Items with an icon to the left are categories of commands. Click on the icon to expand and collapse the tree to hide and show the sub-menus. All non-category items represent commands, symbols, and templates to which you can assign keyboard shortcuts. Description This area displays a description of the item currently selected in the Command pane. Close Clicking this button closes the dialog. There is no Cancel button. Use the Reset all button to restore all shortcuts to their factory settings or the Reset selection button to restore an individual item. Reset all Click this button to restore all shortcuts to their factory settings . Reset selection Click this button to restore the keyboard shortcuts for the currently selected command, symbol, or template to its factory settings . Enter new shortcut key(s) Current keys Assign Remove These dialog items are described in Assigning and removing keyboard shortcuts.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Define Sizes Dialog


This dialog is used to view and/or modify the point sizes assigned to typesizes for the entire equation or for new equations. Click in one of the typesize values to view a descriptive picture to the right that gives you an idea of where the particular size will be used in your equations. Changing the main font size of equations The main font size of an equation is the point size used for most of the equation, as opposed to the size used for subscripts and large symbols, like summation signs and integrals. In MathType's system of typesizes, the main font size is called Full size. To make it easy to change the font size of equations as a whole without changing the proportions between the various sizes, MathType allows you to define all of the other typesizes as percentages of the Full size. So, to change the size of the equation as a whole, you can just enter a new point size for Full size, and all of the other typesizes will be changed relative to it. If you wish to assign sizes that are not relative to Full size, you can assign absolute sizes to any or all of the typesizes in units of inches, centimeters, points, or picas. Use for new equations If this option is checked, the sizes will be changed both for the current equation and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences ). If you uncheck this option, the size settings will affect only the current equation. Factory Settings Click this button to restore the sizes in this dialog to the factory settings .

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Define Spacing Dialog


This dialog is used to view and/or modify the spacing dimensions for the entire equation or for new equations. Click in one of the spacing values to view a descriptive picture to the right that gives you an idea of where the particular dimension will be used in your equations. Most spacing dimensions are distances. These distances can be entered in specific distance units or as a percentage of the Full typesize. The latter allows the spacing to change in proportion to the size you assign to Full in the Define Sizes Dialog. A few spacing values are percentages of some normal value, rather than distances. These are indicated in the spacing value description as (% of normal) and can only be entered as percentages. For example, the operator spacing factor is such a value. MathType determines the spacing between operators and the variables to which they are applied according to the rules of mathematical typesetting but, if you desire, you can reduce this spacing by entering a percentage of less than 100%. Similarly, you can add more spacing by entering a percentage of greater than 100%. Use for new equations If this option is checked, the spacing dimensions will be changed both for the current equation and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences ). If you uncheck this option, the spacing dimensions will affect only the current equation. Factory Settings Click this button to restore the spacing dimensions in this dialog to the factory settings .

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Define Styles Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the font and character style assigned to each style for the entire equation or for new equations. This dialog has two panes, Simple and Advanced, that let you modify the same settings in two different ways.

Simple
The settings on this pane allow you to quickly change the most common options. Choosing a Primary font assigns this font to the Text, Function, Variable, Vector-Matrix and Number styles. The Vector-Matrix style is set to bold and non-italic, while the other styles are all set to non-bold and non-italic, except for Italic variables which is controlled by its own checkbox. Choosing a Greek and math fonts option sets the L.C. Greek, U.C. Greek, Symbol and Extra Math styles to the given font set. The first font is assigned to L.C. Greek, U.C. Greek, and Symbol, and the second font is assigned to Extra Math. The bold and italic character styles are also turned off for these styles, except for Italic lower-case Greek which is controlled by its own checkbox. The above rules for Simple mode are outlined in the table below: Simple mode setting Primary font Styles affected Bold set to Italic set to

Text Function Variable Vector- Matrix Number L.C. Greek U.C. Greek Symbol Extra Math

Off Off Off On Off Off Off Off Off

Off Off ** Off Off ** Off Off Off

Greek and math fonts

** controlled by checkbox. If you make changes in the Advanced pane such that the above patterns of font and character style no longer apply, when you switch to the Simple pane the settings for Primary font and/or Greek and math fonts will be blank. Either choose new options, which will reset the bold and italic character styles to the default settings, or return to the Advanced pane to make minor changes.

Advanced
Use this mode to get finer control over your style assignments. You can assign a different font and character style to each of the 11 styles. Use for new equations If this option is checked, the style settings will be changed both for the current equation and for new equations you create from that point on (see new equation preferences ). If you uncheck this option, the style settings will affect only the current equation . Factory Settings Click this button to restore the style settings in this dialog to the factory settings. Support for international keyboards If your primary written language uses a non-Roman character set (e.g. Greek, Cyrillic), you probably have more than one logical keyboard installed on your computer (Input Locales in the Keyboard section of the Windows Control Panel) that you can switch between using either a keyboard shortcut or the keyboard menu in the System Tray, next to the clock in the Windows Task Bar. If you don't have one now, you may want to add one to make it easier to type Roman alphabet characters for math. Most mathematics in the world uses the Roman alphabet, and since many non-English keyboard layouts have replaced some of the useful math keys (e.g. +, <, >) by alternate characters, it is often more convenient to have both an English keyboard and a nonEnglish keyboard installed. MathType has a special feature for users that have multiple logical keyboards. You can cause the current style to switch to Text whenever you switch to the keyboard for your native language and switch back to math when you switch to the English keyboard. Similarly, you can make the keyboard switch whenever you change style to Text and switch back when you choose a different style, presumably to type more math. If you have multiple logical keyboards, the Language/Keyboard section will be displayed at the bottom of the Define Styles dialog. Text style

This menu allows you to choose the keyboard to associate with the Text style. Whenever you switch to the keyboard chosen here, MathType will switch the current style to Text and vice-versa. To break this association, choose Any. Other styles This menu allows you to choose the keyboard to associate with all styles except Text. Whenever you switch to the keyboard chosen here, MathType will switch the current style to Math and vice versa. To break this association, choose Any.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Edit / New Color Dialog


This dialog allows you to change the color attributes of the color selected in the Edit Color Menu Dialog, or add a new color. Many of these attributes are only important if you plan to save your equations as EPS files for importing into publishing applications like Quark XPress or Adobe PageMaker or InDesign. We'll refer to such applications here as publishing apps and the documents they create as publishing docs. For more detailed explanations of color printing, please refer to your publishing app's documentation. Name The name of a color will be shown in the color menu. It is also important in the creation of color EPS files. It is important to use the same color names in MathType as you used in your publishing docs. This way, like-named colors will be printed on the same color separation. Printing separation The two methods of color printing are Proce ss and Spot: Process color uses four ink colors: cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (also called CMYK). Other colors are printed using small dots of these colors in varying amounts. Spot color uses ink of the specific color created by mixing inks of other colors. Model Colors can be specified using either the RGB model or the CMYK model: RGB allows you to specify colors in terms of amounts of red, blue, and green. This is what you will normally use if you are coloring equations for use in presentations and simple printing. CMYK allows you to specify colors in terms of amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. This color model is more appropriate for use in publishing docs, especially when printing using process colors. Color values Red Green Blue Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Depending on whether you choose the RGB or CMYK color model, you can specify a color using 3 or 4 values, respectively. Each value is a percentage of the indicated color's intensity with 0% meaning to use none of the color and 100% meaning full intensity. You may enter numbers in 1/10ths of a percent if you wish. If you are importing equations as EPS files into a publishing app, the color name is more important than the actual color values you use in MathType, since the definition of the like- named color in the publishing doc will take precedence. All you need to do in MathType is choose a color that is visually close to the color used in the publishing doc. Color picker Click this button to display the standard Windows Color dialog. See the Other Color Dialog for details.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Edit Color Menu Dialog


This dialog allows you to: Add or remove colors from the Color Menu Name colors Define the default equation color that will be used for new equations Define advanced color properties for compatibility with publishing applications like Quark XPress and Adobe PageMaker or InDesign Always on menu This list of colors consists of those colors that are always displayed in the color menu. The checked color is the current default equation color. Other colors This list of colors consists of any other colors used in the equation in windows you currently have open. Move Up Move Down Click these buttons to move the currently selected menu color up or down in the list, allowing you to put more frequently used colors near the top of the menu for easier access. Set as default... Click this button to choose the selected color as the default for new equations. Whenever you create a new equation, any characters you type will be given this color until you change the current color. New Click this button to add a new color to the menu. The Edit/New Color Dialog will be displayed to allow you to define the new color. The new color will initially be a copy of the selected color. Edit Click this button to display the Edit Color Dialog, allowing you to edit the selected color. Factory Settings Click this button to set the Color menu back to contain the basic colors it had when you first installed MathType.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Using Equation Conversion Manager


You can use the Equation Conversion Manager to control the kinds of equations for which MathType will be the designated editor. For example, once you have installed MathType, double-clicking on an equation you created using the Equation Editor that came with Microsoft Word or Office will automatically convert it to a MathType equation. If you don't like this, Equation Conversion Manager is the tool you use to change it. Running the Equation Conversion Manager To run the Equation Conversion Manager, simply choose it from the MathType 6 sub-menu of the Windows Start menu. A dialog will be displayed with two lists of equation types: The left list contains equation types that will be converted to MathType equations when you double-click on them. The right list contains equation types that will not be converted, but will be edited using the equation editing application that was used to create them. Use the two Move buttons in between the lists to move selected equation types from one list to the other. Show equation types for This part of the dialog allows you to show just those equation types for which the editor is installed (installed editors only) or show all equation types even for those that are part of products you do not own (all MathType-compatible editors). The latter choice allows you to decide which editor is used for equations contained in a document that an associate might give to you. Details Click this button to see details of each equation editor's OLE registration. This is information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems. MathType 6 Details Click this button to see details of MathType's OLE registration. This is information that is only useful for troubleshooting OLE problems

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Expression Properties Dialog


This dialog allows you to: Enter or edit the status bar description associated with a toolbar expression; Edit the expression itself; Add or remove the keyboard shortcut that may be used to insert the expression into an equation. Description for expression This item defines the text that will be displayed in the status bar when the mouse pointer is over the toolbar cell. If you have defined a keyboard shortcut for the expression, it will be displayed as well. Edit expression Click this button to open a new equation window containing the expression. Once you have made changes, just close the window and save the expression. See Also Toolbars Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts Status Bar Drag-and-Drop

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Fence Alignment Dialog


Use this dialog to control the vertical alignment of a Fence Template (brackets, braces, parentheses, etc.) with the rest of the line in which it resides. This dialog also allows you to set the default alignment for new fence templates. The template affected is the currently selected fence template or the one containing the insertion point. Alignment options Although the pictures above the three choices are intended to show how each affects alignment, the easiest way to see the effect of this control is to try it. Here is a more technical description of the 3 choices:

The math axis of the contents is aligned with the math axis of the rest of the line, the fence characters are vertically centered with respect to the math axis and are sized to cover the contents.

The math axis of the contents is aligned with the math axis of the rest of the line, the fence characters are sized to cover the contents.

The fence characters are sized to cover the contents, then the template is vertically centered with respect to the math axis of the rest of the line.

Default for new templates These buttons allow you to select the default alignment for new fence templates you insert in your equation from now on. You can have a different default for the group of fence templates that have "pointy" characters from those that do not. This is because pointy fences need to be aligned with the math axis to look good but this is not as important for the others.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Functions Recognized Dialog


MathType automatically recognizes standard mathematical function names like "sin", "cos" and applies the Function style to them. You can use this dialog to customize the set of functions MathType will automatically recognize. Removing a function To remove a function from automatic recognition, select its name in the list box and then click Remove . If you feel you have removed a function by mistake, you can click Cancel to discard your changes or Reset to restore the list of functions to MathType's factory settings . Although you might have removed a function from automatic recognition, you still can give a specific function name the proper style using commands on the Style menu. Adding a function To add a function to the list, type its name in the New function box, then click Add. Limitations on new functions Functions can consist of up to 15 characters, each of which must be a character that MathType would normally place in the variable style, which means accented and un-accented alphabetic characters only. Punctuation, numerals, and operators are not allowed.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Symbol Dialog


This is one of MathType's most powerful dialogs. Some of the tasks you can perform are: Insert a specific character or mathematical symbol into your equation Add a frequently used symbol to the toolbar Add a keyboard shortcut for a frequently used symbol Find a symbol by matching words in its description Dialog Overview The Insert Symbol dialog is divided into 3 vertical sections by 2 horizontal dividing lines: Top: the View by part is used to define what is displayed in the symbol grid Middle: the Symbol grid shows 128 characters at a time Bottom: the Shortcut section allows you to add or review keyboard shortcuts associated with symbols View by This section consists of the View by menu and the items to the right of it (those above the line running under the menu). The items in this section control which characters are displayed in the Symbol grid. Here are the View by choices and how they work:
Font

Choose this option if you want to insert characters from a font whose name you already know, or if you want to browse through the available fonts. Once you have chosen this option, the font menu and Bold and Italic checkboxes will be available to let you choose the font and character style to view and insert.
Style

Choose this option to view the characters of the font currently assigned to a particular style.
Description

Choose this option to view characters from all fonts that have a certain word or phrase in their description. Once you have chosen this option, the New search button will be available to let you enter new description-matching criteria (see the Insert Symbol Search Dialog). The Bold and Italic checkboxes will also be available to let you choose the character style to view and insert. The current description-matching criteria will be displayed in the Description contains item. Symbol grid This section consists of 128 character cells that show the characters selected using the View by options. If Font or Style was chosen in the View by menu, the Range listbox and the Show all ranges checkbox will be visible. If Description was chosen in the View by menu, the Description contains text item and the Show one of each checkbox will be visible instead.
Range

This menu allows you to select which character range you want to see displayed in the grid: All known characters: Shows all of the characters that MathType believes are in the selected font (this is limited to MathType's knowledge of fonts and will not be available if it has no knowledge of the current font). Entire font: Shows every character position in the font (will not be available for fonts with large numbers of characters). Other ranges: Shows the characters in the given Unicode range.
Show all ranges

Check this box to force the Range listbox to show all Unicode ranges, not just those that contain characters in the current font.
Description contains

This item shows the current description-matching criteria entered in the Insert Symbol Search Dialog.
Show one of each

Check this box to limit the symbol grid to show only one character (from the first font that contains it) for each description matched by the search criteria. If this box is not checked, all versions of each character whose description matches the search criteria will be shown. As each character may be present in many fonts, this might cause too many characters to be shown in the grid, making it difficult to find the character you want.
Font

This item shows the font of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.
Description

This item shows the description of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.
Encoding

This item shows the font encoding of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.
Unicode

This item shows the Unicode value of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.
Font position

This item shows the index within the font of the currently selected character in the symbol grid.
Keystroke

This item shows the keystroke, if any, that may be used to type the currently selected character in the symbol grid. This keystroke will only be valid (i.e. will insert the character) when the font is the current font (or style, where the font in question is assigned to the style). Shortcut This section shows the keyboard shortcut, if any, associated with the currently highlighted character in the symbol grid. See Also Adding Symbols from the Insert Symbol Dialog to the Expression Bars Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts Finding a Symbol by Matching Words in its Description

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insert Symbol Search Dialog


This dialog is used to set the character description search criteria for the Insert Symbol Dialog. You can enter a text string that must match a character's description in order to appear in the symbol grid.

The match string


This text string can contain: A single word that must be present in the description A phrase that must be present A combination of words and phrases, separated by spaces, all of which must be present A word or phrase preceded by a dash (-) to indicate that it must NOT be present in a description for it to be considered a match

Examples:
For simplicity, lets assume the character descriptions that we are trying to match are the following (instead of the thousands MathType actually contains): 1. Latin small letter m 2. Latin small letter n 3. Upwards arrow from bar 4. Rightwards arrow from bar 5. Bar operator 6. Black small square 7. Up harpoon (barb right) 8. Latin letter small capital A If the search text is: smal small letter Matches from above list:

1, 2, 6, 8: they all contain "small" 1, 2, 8: they all contain "small" and "letter" 1, 2: doesn't match 8 as the words aren't in order 3, 4, 5, 7: matches 7 because of "bar" in "barb" 4, 7: they both contain "right" 7: doesn't match 4 because of "wards" in "rightwards"

"small letter"

bar

right right wards

Notes All matching is case-insensitive ("a" matches "a" or "A"); Matching is not by whole word ("right" matches "right", "bright", and "rightwards"); All words and phrases (unless preceded by '-') in the search text must be present for a description to be a match.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Line Spacing Dialog


This dialog is used to change the line spacing of the line or lines in the current selection, or the line containing the insertion point. Line spacing is measured from the baseline of the line whose spacing is being changed to the baseline of the line below it. Please note that changing line spacing in this dialog does not affect the line spacing used throughout the equation or for new equations. This can be changed in the Define Spacing Dialog. Factory Settings Click this button to restore the line spacing to the factory settings. See Also Units

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Load Equation Preferences Dialog


You can use this dialog to load an equation preference file that was saved earlier using the Save Preferences Dialog. If you want to change the equation preferences of several or all equations in a Microsoft Word document, use the format equations command from Word. See Format Equations Dialog. This dialog works like any other File Open dialog, with an additional checkbox item described below. Use for new equations If this option is checked, the equation preferences will be used both for the current equation and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences ). If you uncheck this option, the equation preferences will affect only the current equation.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Load Equation Preferences from Factory Settings Dialog


Use this dialog to control whether you want to reset equation preferences (sizes, styles, and spacing) to the factory settings for the current equation and, optionally, for new equations you create from now on. Uncheck Use for new equations if you only want to change the preferences for the current equation.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Load Equation Preferences from File Dialog


This dialog appears whenever you open an existing equation preferences file by selecting it from the Preferences menu or by dropping it onto MathType. Click OK to set the equation preferences for the current equation as specified in the file, or Cancel to quit. Use for new equations If this option is checked, the equation preferences will be used both for the current equation and for new equations you create from that point on (see New Equation Preferences ). If you uncheck this option, the equation preferences will affect only the current equation .

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Matrix Dialog
This dialog is used to define or modify the attributes of a matrix template. To create a new matrix, use a Matrix Template. To modify an existing matrix, select it or place the insertion point anywhere in it and choose Matrix from the Format menu. Column alignment Choose either Left, Center, Right, At = (relational operator), or At . (decimal point) to align all the matrix elements in all columns. In the current version of MathType, it is not possible to apply alignment to a single column. # of Columns Enter the number of columns desired for the matrix. Note that by reducing the number of columns, the contents of the deleted columns will be lost. Equal column widths Check this option to force all the columns of the matrix to have the same width. Row alignment Choose either Top, Baseline , or Bottom to align all the matrix elements in all rows. In the current version of MathType, it is not possible to apply alignment to a single row. # of Rows Enter the number of rows desired for the matrix. Note that by reducing the number of rows, the contents of the deleted rows will be lost. Equal row heights Check this option to force all the rows of the matrix to have the same height. Partition lines The preview image of the matrix allows you to add partition lines between the rows and columns of the matrix, as well as around the edges. Click between the elements to change the style of the line between the elements. Each click selects a different line style, rotating through solid, dashed, dotted, and none (no line at all). Clear all lines Click to remove all partition lines.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Object Editing Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to make choices that affect editing of equations from within your word processor and other OLE -compatible applications. Edit in a separate window instead of in-place Check this option if you prefer editing equations in a separate window from your word-processing document. This can make editing easier by allowing you to work at a different zoom level than in your word processor so you can more easily see small characters, like superscripts, primes, and dots. Uncheck this option if you prefer editing equations directly in the document. Some applications may not support this feature. In this case, editing will always be in a separate window. Don't show 'Save Changes' dialog for separate window Check this option if you want to suppress display of the Save Changes dialog that normally appears when you close the equation window after making changes. Your changes will then be saved into the document automatically. Startup in server mode Check this option if you prefer that MathType start in server mode whenever you edit an equation for the first time in an editing session. This makes equation editing more responsive but you must exit the MathType application separately when you are finished working with equations.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Other Size Dialog


Use this dialog to assign a particular point size to selected characters or subsequently typed characters. You must enter the size in points (decimal fractions are allowed). We recommend that you use a system of typesizes rather than explicit sizes as much as possible, to take advantage of MathType's "intelligent" application of mathematical typesetting rules.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Other Style Dialog


Use this dialog to assign a particular font and character style to selected characters or subsequently typed characters. We recommend that you use styles rather than explicit fonts and character styles as much as possible, to take advantage of MathType's "intelligent" application of mathematical typesetting rules.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Save As Dialog
Use this dialog to save an equation as an individual file. Although you will most likely save equations in word processing documents using OLE or EGO , saving an equation as a file is useful for exchanging equations with other people, moving equations to other computers, saving as EPS for use in desktop publishing applications, or saving them as GIF for use in Internet publishing. File Formats MathType can save equations in several file formats. Use the Save as type pull-down menu to choose a format. No matter which format you choose, you can always open the equation file for later editing or use. Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
Encapsulated PostScript/none Encapsulated PostScript/WMF Encapsulated PostScript/TIFF

EPS is a file format used for graphics in desktop publishing applications like Adobe PageMaker and Quark XPress. MathType can save equations in several kinds of EPS file, each defined by the type of preview image saved in the file. Within a desktop publishing application, the preview image is used to display the equation on screen, whereas the PostScript code itself is used only when printing. The WMF preview image is a Windows Metafile, a standard graphics format generally used only on computers with Microsoft Windows. The TIFF preview image is a cross-platform bitmap format. Use the none option if no preview image is desired. In this case, the EPS file will be a simple ASCII text file. Windows Metafile (WMF) This is the standard graphics file format for the Windows operating system. Although the WMF format can accommodate bitmap images, the metafiles created by MathType are "draw"-style graphics and, therefore, are scalable and will print at full resolution. Use this format to import equations into drawing applications. Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) GIF is a graphics file format generally used for line art (as opposed to JPEG which is best for photographs) in Internet publishing applications. It first became popular as the graphics format used in the CompuServe online system. Save equations in this format for the creation of webpages. Use the Web and GIF Preferences Dialog to choose the resolution, transparency, and background color you want your GIF equations to have. A utomatic File Numbering If you intend to create many equation files for import into another application (e.g. EPS files for import into a desktop publishing document or GIF files for a World Wide Web document), it can be handy to give them numbered file names, like "eqn003.eps". MathType can help you do this by automatically filling in the File name box in the Save As dialog with a name that follows a pattern you supply. To enable this feature, check the Automatic file numbering option. MathType will then automatically generate a new file name using the pattern in the File name pattern box and the number in the Next number box. For example, if you enter a pattern of "eqn#" and a next number of 8, the next 3 equations you save will have names of "eqn8", "eqn9", and "eqn10". Use several consecutive #s to indicate make the number part of the name have a particular width. In the above example, if you had entered a pattern of "eqn####", the file names would have been "eqn0008", "eqn0009", and "eqn0010". This will make them sort in a more natural order in sorted lists. You may change the File name pattern or the Next number boxes at any time; for example, to indicate that the equations belong to a different chapter of your book, or to start the sequence at a new number.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Save Equation Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to save a preference file containing the equation preferences from the current equation or the New Equation Preferences. Preference files created here may be used in the following situations: In the Load Equation Preferences Dialog In the Format Equation Command in Microsoft Word In the Set Equation Preferences Command in Microsoft Word On the MathType Command Line This dialog works like any other File Save dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Server Dialog
This dialog is displayed when the MathType application is started in "server mode". Normally when you edit equations using the Insert Object command, use the Insert Equation toolbar button, or double-click on an equation in your word processor (or other OLE -compatible application), the MathType application is started and stopped each time you edit a different equation. Server mode avoids the frequent starting and stopping by keeping MathType running during your entire equation editing session. There are several ways to start MathType in server mode: Choose the MathType Server item in the MathType sub-menu in the Windows Start menu Check the OLE Startup in server mode option using the Object Editing Preferences command on the Preferences Menu Run MathType with "-server" on the command line. When MathType is running in server mode, it will stay running until you click Exit in the MathType Server dialog or, optionally, you can use the timeout feature that will automatically terminate MathType after it has been idle for a length of time you specify (see the Delay before exit when no equation windows are open item, described below). See Object Editing Preferences Dialog and MathType's Command Line Options Exit Click this button to terminate the MathType application immediately. If there are any equation windows open that contain unsaved changes, you will be asked if you want to save them. New Click this button to open a new, untitled equation window. This command is the same as the New command on the File Menu. Open Click this button to open an existing equation file. This command is the same as the Open command on the File Menu. Continue Click this button to minimize this dialog. This has the same affect as clicking the minimize button in the top-right corner of the dialog. Delay before exit when no equation windows are open This menu allows you to choose the length of time before MathType will automatically terminate after it has been idle. Any kind of equation editing operation or just viewing this dialog will reset the timer. If you choose Forever from this menu, MathType will only exit when you click Exit in this dialog or from the File Menu of an equation window. OLE startup in server mode Check this option if you want MathType to start in server mode whenever you do the first OLE equation editing operation. This option is also available in the Object Editing Preferences Dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Tab Properties Dialog


This dialog allows you to edit the text in the toolbar tabs and also assign a keyboard shortcut that brings the tab to the front. To display this dialog, simply double-click on the tab you want to edit or right-click on it and choose Properties.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Translators Dialog
This dialog allows you to specify what kind of information will be placed on the clipboard whenever you use the Cut or Copy commands on the Edit menu. Normally, Cut or Copy will place a graphic image of the selected part of the equation onto the clipboard, ready to be pasted into a document. However, using the options in this dialog, you can have the selected equation or fragment be translated into text on the clipboard in one of the computer languages for which a translator is available. See Translators for information on the translators that are installed with MathType.

Equation object (Windows OLE Graphic)


Click this option to place an OLE equation object on the clipboard. This is the default and is normally used to transfer equation material between one MathType window and another, or between a MathType window and another application, such as a word processor. When you paste an equation into another application's window, how it is handled depends on that application. If the application is OLE-compatible, it will be treated as a new OLE object. If the application is not EGO- or OLE-compatible, it will be treated as a graphic image.

Translation to other language (text):


MathType is supplied with several translators that allow equations to be translated into several mathematical computer languages such as TeX and MathML. Click this option to cause MathType to translate the selected equation whenever you use the Cut or Copy command. The information placed on the clipboard will be plain text in the language selected in the Translator list. Translator Use this listbox to choose from one of the translators currently available to MathType. The text of each list item describes the computer language (or variant) that the translator can translate equations into. The Description item shows a longer description of the translator and the File item shows the filename of the translator itself. Beside the translators that are installed as part of the MathType product, there may be other translators available. Also, it is possible to create your own translator or modify an existing one. See Translators for information on the translators that are installed with MathType. Check the support section of our website for news regarding other translators that may be available and information on creating or modifying translators. Include translator name in translation This option instructs the translator software to place the name of the translator in the translation. This is used by MathType's support for Microsoft Word to allow its Convert Equations command to find the equations in the document. If you are using MathType with a TeX application instead of Word, you should leave this option unchecked. Some translators may ignore this option. Include MathType data in translation This option instructs the translator software to place MathType's equation representation in the translation. This allows the equation to be pasted back into MathType for later editing and should normally be checked. Some translators may ignore this option. See Also Working With MathML Working With TeX

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Unlock/Register MathType Dialog


This dialog allows you to unlock MathType to enable full functionality. To unlock MathType you must have a valid product key. You can obtain one by purchasing a copy of MathType, either directly from Design Science or from a dealer. You can purchase MathType online at our website , contact us directly via email at sales@dessci.com , or by phone at (800) 827-0685 (U.S. and Canada) or (562) 432-2920 (rest of the world). Once you've obtained a product key, enter your information. In order to receive free technical support, upgrade notices and special upgrade pricing, register your copy of MathType by entering your email and ensuring the check box that allows the installer to send your information to Design Science is selected.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Web and GIF Preferences Dialog


This dialog allows you to: Set the resolution, dots-per-inch (dpi), of the GIF equation files you save; Set the background color for GIF files; Adjust GIF options such as transparency and smoothing. Set HTML/text to be copied to the clipboard when a GIF is saved.

Bitmap resolution
Use these items to set the resolution (dpi) of the GIF equation files you save from now on. The preset values are: 72 dpi , 96 dpi, and 120 dpi . Current screen (nnn dpi) shows the resolution that your monitor is currently running at, and Other allows you to enter any other dpi to use when saving GIFs. For example, 300 or 600 dpi is good for print quality GIFs.

Bitmap background
Use the Change button to bring up the Color Dialog to set a new background color.
Smooth edges (anti- aliasing)

Check this option to create GIF equation images with smooth edges. This is done by using a technique called anti-aliasing. Pixels on the edges of each character are given colors that are intermediate between the character color and the background color. Smoothing generally works best on characters larger than 12pt, so you may want to experiment.
Transparent

Check this option if you want the background of GIF equation images to be transparent, allowing the background of your webpage to show between the characters of the equation.
Using transparency with smoothing

You can use these options together. However, to get the best results you should understand how they interact. Smoothing will be performed using the background color, as described above, even when the Transparent option is checked. In this case, non-transparent pixels will be generated around the edges of the characters. The colors of these pixels will be just as they would if the Transparent option was not checked. This will only look good if the background color of the webpage is close to the background color set in this dialog. The closer they are, the more effective the smoothing will be. If the background is highly patterned, you may find equations look better with the Smooth edges option turned off.

Copy HTML/text to clipboard on GIF file save


Check this option if you want MathType to put a fragment of HTML (or any other text) on the clipboard every time you save an equation in GIF format. This is useful when you run MathType at the same time as your favorite webpage editor. After you create and save each equation, just switch to your editor and paste the HTML code or other text in. Paste variable This menu can be used to paste a variable into the HTML/text fragment you enter in Text to copy. When you save an equation, the variables in the HTML/text will be replaced by the corresponding value for the generated GIF. Variables are identified by the form $(variable ). For example, $(URLFileName) will be replaced by the name of the GIF equation file you just saved, in URLescaped form. The available variables are shown in the table below. The sample values are based on a GIF saved as C:\Program Files\MathType\File 1.gif with a height=37 pixels, width=80 pixels, and a baseline adjustment of 12 pixels. Variable URLFileVolume URLFileDirectory URLFileName FileVolume FileDir FileName Height_EM Description URL File Volume URL File Directory URL File Name File Volume File Directory File Name Height in EMs Sample Values C: /Program%20Files/MathType File 1.gif C: \Program Files\MathType File 1.gif 3.0

Height_PX Height_IN Height_MM Height_PT Width_EM Width_PX Width_IN Width_MM Width_PT Base_EM Base_PX Base_IN Base_MM Base_PT Base_%

Height in pixels Height in inches Height in millimeters Height in points Width in EMs Width in pixels Width in inches Width in millimeters Width in points Baseline in EMs Baseline in pixels Baseline in inches Baseline in millimeters Baseline in points Baseline as % of height

37 .51 13.0 37.0 6.6 80 1.11 28.2 80.0 1.0 12 .16 4.2 12.0 32

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Workspace Preferences Dialog


Use this dialog to change settings that affect MathType's working environment. Toolbar size You can use this section to make the toolbar larger, in case you find the toolbar icons too small to see easily, or to make it smaller, if it is taking up too much space on the screen. You can also make the toolbar take up less screen space by hiding unused bars (see the View Menu). Insertion point thickness You can use this section to choose an insertion point thickness that suits you. Empty slot thickness In normal view (see Show Nesting on the View Menu), empty slots are displayed as dotted boxes. Use this section to set a thickness that suits you. You can also set the color used for empty slots (see Empty slot color below) Ruler units Use this menu to set the spacing units for the graduation marks displayed in the ruler to either inches, centimeters, points, or picas. User interface language Use this menu to set the language used for dialogs, menus, and messages in the MathType application. You must restart MathType to see the new language. You will only see one language listed here unless you have purchased a multi- language edition of MathType. Space and tab color Click the Change button to change the color used for spaces, tabs, and alignment markers. These normally invisible markers are displayed if Show All is checked in the View Menu. Empty slot color Click the Change button to change the color used to display empty slots in normal view (see Show Nesting on the View Menu). You can also set the thickness of the empty slot box (see Empty slot thickness above). Show character and template codes in the status bar Check this option to show the character and template codes in the Status Bar. These will be displayed when the mouse pointer is over a toolbar cell containing a symbol or template and in the Insert Symbol dialog. These character codes are useful to translator writers, for example. Allow TeX language entry from the keyboard Check this option to allow keyboard entry of a subset of TeX that is supported by Wikipedia. See Working With TeX and Using TeX Language Input. Show all instructional messages again Occasionally, a one-time message will appear explaining different features of MathType. These can be turned off on the message dialog. To have these messages appear again, check this option.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Zoom Dialog
This dialog allows you to change the scale at which you see equations in MathType. Increase the zoom scale to make it easier to see fine details of your equations. Reduce it to see more of your equations on screen. The zoom scale will not affect the size of equations in word processing documents or when they are printed. Magnification Select one of the preset magnification levels of 800%, 400%, 200%, or 100%, or select Custom to enter a different zoom level (e.g., 150%).

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Keyboard shortcuts
In This Chapter Formatting Menu Commands Navigation and Selection Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots) Toolbar Commands Window Control

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Formatting
Shortcuts for formatting equation elements: Insert Tab (Ctrl+Tab) New Line (Enter) Nudge Down (Ctrl+Down) Nudge Left (Ctrl+Left) Nudge Right (Ctrl+Right) Nudge Up (Ctrl+Up) Rotate Fence Alignment (Ctrl+Shift+A)(Ctrl+Shift+A)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Menu Commands
In This Chapter File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Format Menu Style Menu Size Menu Preferences Menu Help Menu

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

File Menu
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts. Commands appearing on the File menu: New (Ctrl+N) Open... (Ctrl+O) Close (Ctrl+F4) Save (Ctrl+S) Print... (Ctrl+P) Exit (Alt+F4)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Edit Menu
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts. Commands appearing on the Edit menu: Undo (Ctrl+Z) Redo (Ctrl+Y) Cut (Ctrl+X) Copy (Ctrl+C) Paste (Ctrl+V)

Select All (Ctrl+A)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

View Menu
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts. Commands for items appearing on the View menu: Show All (Ctrl+Shift+Y) Show Nesting (Ctrl+Shift+N) Symbol Palettes (Ctrl+Alt+K) Template Palettes (Ctrl+Alt+T) Small Bar (Ctrl+Alt+F) Large Tabbed Bar (Ctrl+Alt+L) Small Tabbed Bar (Ctrl+Alt+S) Toolbar (Ctrl+Alt+B) Ruler (Ctrl+Alt+R) Commands appearing on the Zoom submenu of the View menu: 100% (Ctrl+1) 200% (Ctrl+2) 400% (Ctrl+4) 800% (Ctrl+8)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Format Menu
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts. Commands appearing on the Format menu: Align Left (Ctrl+Shift+L) Align Center (Ctrl+Shift+J) Align Right (Ctrl+Shift+R)

Commands appearing on the Color submenu of the Format menu:

Commands appearing on the Matrix submenu of the Format menu: Add Row Above (Ctrl+M,A) Add Row Below (Ctrl+M,B) Add Column to Left (Ctrl+M,L) Add Column to Right (Ctrl+M,R) Delete Row (Ctrl+M,D) Delete Column (Ctrl+M,Shift+D) Change Matrix (Ctrl+M,C)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Style Menu
Commands appearing on the Style menu: Math (Ctrl+Plus) Text (Ctrl+Shift+E) Function (Ctrl+Shift+F) Variable (Ctrl+Shift+V) Greek-Symbol (Ctrl+Shift+G) Vector-Matrix (Ctrl+Shift+B) User 1 (Ctrl+Shift+U) User 2 (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Size Menu
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts. Commands appearing on the Size menu:

Smaller (Ctrl+<) Larger (Ctrl+>)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Preferences Menu
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts. Commands appearing on the Preferences menu:

Commands appearing on the Equation Preferences submenu of the Preferences menu:

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Help Menu
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts. Commands appearing on the Help menu: Contents and Index (F1)

Commands appearing on the MathType on the Web submenu of the Help menu:

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Navigation and Selection


Commands for moving around and/or selecting items in the current equation: Beginning of Slot (Home) Delete Left (Backspace) Delete Right (Delete) End of Slot (End) Move Down (Down) Move Down Extend Selection (Shift+Down) Move Left (Left) Move Left Extend Selection (Shift+Left) Move Right (Right) Move Right Extend Selection (Shift+Right) Move Up (Up) Move Up Extend Selection (Shift+Up) Next End-of-Slot (Tab) Previous End-of-Slot (Shift+Tab) Scroll Up (Page Up) Scroll Down (Page Down) Skip Left (Ctrl+Shift+Left) Skip Right (Ctrl+Shift+Right) Select Current Slot (Ctrl+Shift+S)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Keyboard Modifiers (one-shots)


Shortcuts for specifying the style of the next character typed into the current equation: Greek-Symbol One-Shot (Ctrl+G) Vector-Matrix One-Shot (Ctrl+B) User 1 One-Shot (Ctrl+U) User 2 One-Shot (Ctrl+Alt+U) Shortcuts for modifying the method used to insert the next template entered with a keyboard shortcut: Replace Selected Template One-Shot (Ctrl+Q) Use Alternate Template Form One-Shot (Ctrl+Shift+O)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Toolbar Commands
Commands for items appearing on the toolbar: Dock or Float (Ctrl+Alt+D) Commands for setting keyboard focus within the toolbar: Focus Focus Focus Focus Focus to Symbol Palettes (F2 or F5) to Template Palettes (F6) to Small Bar (F7) to Large Tabbed Bar (F8) to Small Tabbed Bar (F9)

Commands for setting keyboard focus within the Tabbed Bars: Focus Focus Focus Focus Focus Focus Focus Focus Focus to to to to to to to to to Tab 1 "Algebra" (CtrlF10,1) Tab 2 "Derivs" (CtrlF10,2) Tab 3 "Statistics" (CtrlF10,3) Tab 4 "Matrices" (CtrlF10,4) Tab 5 "Sets" (CtrlF10,5) Tab 6 "Trig" (CtrlF10,6) Tab 7 "Geometry" (CtrlF10,7) Tab 8 "Tab 8" (CtrlF10,8) Tab 9 "Tab 9" (CtrlF10,9)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Window Control
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts. Commands for controlling the application's windows:

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Toolbars
In This Chapter Toolbar Overview Navigating with the keyboard Viewing and Positioning Symbol Palettes Template Palettes Small Bar Tabs Large Tabbed Bar Small Tabbed Bar Symbol Palettes Template Palettes

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Toolbar Overview

MathType's toolbar is used to enter symbols, templates, mathematical expression, and even entire equations into the equation you are working on. See Also Viewing and positioning the Toolbar Navigating in the Toolbar using the keyboard Symbol Palettes Template Palettes Small Bar Tabs Large Tabbed Bar Small Tabbed Bar

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Navigating with the keyboard


There are two methods for beginning keyboard access to the toolbar. Navigating in a palette menu Once a symbol or template palette menu is pulled down, you can use the arrow keys to move the focus around in the menu. Once you have moved the focus to a symbol or template you want to insert into the equation, type Enter. To close the menu without inserting anything, type Esc (the Escape key) or click somewhere else with the mouse. You may have to type Esc more than once to set the focus back to the equation. Setting the focus to one of the bars There are several pre-defined keyboard shortcuts that will place the keyboard focus in each of the bars that make up the toolbar: F2 or F5 Symbol Palettes F6 Template Palettes F7 Small Bar F8 Large Tabbed Bar F9 Small Tabbed Bar Once the focus is on one of the bars, you can use the arrow keys to move the focus around in the desired direction. Besides the arrow keys, these keys are also used: Enter (return): Type this key to insert a symbol, template, or expression into the equation once you have moved the focus over the one you want. You also use this key to open (pull down) a palette menu that is closed. Esc (escape): Type this key to return the focus back to the equation or to close an open palette menu. Other toolbar- related shortcuts Using the Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences Menu, you can modify any of the keyboard shortcuts mentioned above. You can also assign shortcuts to display the various layers of the tabbed bars. See Customize Keyboard Dialog. See Also Toolbar Overview

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Viewing and Positioning


You can: Dock or float the toolbar Just double-click on the toolbar's drag handle, its title, or any empty part of the toolbar to toggle between docked and floating. You can also dock the toolbar by dragging it over the top or bottom of an equation window and releasing it (the drag outline will change to indicate you are over a docking position). You can prevent the toolbar from docking by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging. Move the toolbar You can drag the floating toolbar as you would any window to move it. If the toolbar is docked, you can move it to the top or bottom of the window by dragging it. Hide or show the toolba r The Toolbar command on the View Menu toggles between hiding and showing the toolbar. If you can create all the equations you need from the keyboard, you might want to hide the toolbar to allow more screen space for equations. Resize the toolbar If the toolbar's items are too small to see or it takes up too much space on your screen, you can use the Workspace Preferences Dialog to choose between 3 different sizes. Hide or show an individual bar There is a group of 5 commands on the View Menu, one for each bar in the toolbar, that you can use to toggle the display of individual bars. If you never use some of the bars, you might hide them to make the toolbar smaller. See Also Toolbar Overview

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Symbol Palettes
The Symbol Palettes consist of 10 pull-down menus. Each menu is filled with items that insert a single character or symbol into your equation at the insertion point . Although they look a little different, the palette menus work just like the Windows application menus you are already familiar with. The symbol description is displayed in the Status Bar as the mouse passes over each palette menu item, along with any assigned keyboard shortcut. See Also Toolbar Overview Viewing and Positioning Symbol Palettes Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Template Palettes
The Template Palettes consist of pull-down menus. Each menu is filled with items that insert a template into your equation at the insertion point . Although they look a little different, the palette menus work just like the application menus you are already familiar with. The template description is displayed in the status bar as the mouse passes over each palette menu item, along with any assigned keyboard shortcut. To enclose an expression in your equation by a template (e.g., a radical sign around its contents), simply select it before inserting the template. See Also Toolbar: Overview Replacing one Template with Another Expanding Integrals Toolbar Viewing and Positioning Template Palettes Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Small Bar
The Small Bar is a place you can add often-used symbols, templates, and small expressions. Once you have added items to the bar, they can be inserted into your equations at any time by just clicking on them. See Also Toolbar Overview Editing the Status Bar description for Expression Bar Items Editing Expressions in the Bars Removing Items from the Bars Viewing and Positioning Adding symbols and templates from the palettes to the expression bars

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Tabs
The Tabs allow you to switch between 9 layers of expressions, symbols, and templates. To switch to a new layer, just click on the tab. You can also rename Tabs to organize your toolbar however you like. For quick access to each layer from the keyboard, you can assign a keyboard shortcut to a Tab. To rename a Tab or assign a shortcut, just double-click on it to bring up the Tab Properties Dialog. When dragging items to the toolbar, you can switch tabs by holding the mouse pointer over a tab; after a short while the toolbar will display the items associated with this tab. See Also Toolbar Overview Viewing and Positioning

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Large Tabbed Bar


The Large Tabbed Bar is a place you can add often-used expressions. Once you have added an expression to the bar, it can be inserted into your equations at any time by just clicking on it. Use the Tabs to access more expressions. See Also Toolbar Overview Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items Editing Expressions in the Bars Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression Removing Items from the Bars Viewing and Positioning

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Small Tabbed Bar


The Small Tabbed Bar is a place you can add often-used symbols , templates , and small expressions. Once you have added an item to the bar, it can be inserted into your equations at any time by just clicking on it. Use the Tabs to access more items. See Also Toolbar Overview Adding Symbols and Templates from the Palettes to the Expression Bars Editing the Status Bar Description for Expression Bar Items Editing Expressions in the Bars Adding a Keyboard Shortcut for an Expression Removing Items from the Bars Viewing and Positioning

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Symbol Palettes
In This Chapter Symbol Palettes Set Theory Symbols Relational symbols Spaces and Ellipses Embellishments Operator symbols Arrow symbols Logical Symbols Miscellaneous symbols Greek Characters (Lowercase) Greek Characters (Uppercase)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Symbol Palettes
Relational symbols Spaces and ellipses Embellishments Operator symbols Arrow symbols Logical symbols Set theory symbols Miscellaneous symbols Greek characters (lowercase) Greek characters (uppercase)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Set Theory Symbols


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Element of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,E) Not an element of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+E) Union from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,U) Intersection from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,X) Union from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Shift+U) Intersection from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Shift+X) Subset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,C) Superset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,S)

Not a subset of from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+C) Empty set from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,O)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Relational symbols
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Less-than or equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,,) Greater-than or equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,.)

Tilde operator from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+~) Almost equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,~)

Not equal to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,+) Identical to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,=)

Proportional to from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,P)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Spaces and Ellipses


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Alignment mark (Ctrl+;) 1-point space (Ctrl+Alt+Space) Thin space (1/6 EM) (Ctrl+Space or Ctrl+K,2) Thick space (1/3 EM) (Ctrl+Shift+Space) EM space (Ctrl+K,4) Horizontal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,_) Math-axis ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,-) Vertical ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,|) Up right diagonal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,/) Down right diagonal ellipsis from Extra Math style (Ctrl+.,\)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Embellishments
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Prime (Ctrl+Alt+') Double prime (Ctrl+") Triple prime (Ctrl+6,Alt+') Back prime (Ctrl+6,`) Not (Ctrl+6,N) Strike-through (Ctrl+6,Alt+-) Cross-out (Ctrl+6,X) Slash (up) (Ctrl+6,/) Slash (down) (Ctrl+6,\) Single dot (Ctrl+Alt+.) Double dot (Ctrl+6,2) Triple dot (Ctrl+6,3) Quad dot (Ctrl+6,4) Under single dot (Ctrl+6,!) Under double dot (Ctrl+6,@) Under triple dot (Ctrl+6,#) Under quad dot (Ctrl+6,$) Over-bar (Ctrl+_) Tilde (Ctrl+6,~) Arc (frown) (Ctrl+6,9) Arc (smile) (Ctrl+6,0) Hat (Ctrl+6,6) Under bar (Ctrl+6,_) Under arc (frown) (Ctrl+6,() Under arc (smile) (Ctrl+6,)) Right arrow (Ctrl+Alt+-) Left arrow (Ctrl+6,Left) Double-headed arrow (Ctrl+6,Up) Right harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Right) Left harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Left) Under right arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Right) Under left arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Left) Under double-headed arrow (Ctrl+6,Shift+Up) Under right harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Shift+Right) Under left harpoon (Ctrl+6,Alt+Shift+Left)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Operator symbols
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Plus-minus sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,=) Minus-plus sign from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,+) Multiplication sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,T) Asterisk operator from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,*) Division sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,/)

Dot operator from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,.) Bullet from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,8) Left-pointing angle bracket from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,<) Right-pointing angle bracket from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,>) Left white square bracket from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,[) Right white square bracket from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,])

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Arrow symbols
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Left right arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Left) Rightwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Right) Leftwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Left) Up down arrow from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Up) Upwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Up) Downwards arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Down) Left right double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Shift+Left) Rightwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Right) Leftwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Left) Up down double arrow from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Alt+Shift+Up) Upwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Up) Downwards double arrow from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+Down)

Rightwards arrow from bar from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,Tab) Downwards arrow with corner leftwards from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Enter)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Logical Symbols
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Therefore from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,T) Because or since from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,B) There exists from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,E) For all from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,A) Not sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,N) Logical and from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,7) Logical or from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,\)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Miscellaneous symbols
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Partial differential from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,D) Fraktur capital I from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+I) Fraktur capital R from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,Shift+R) Alef symbol from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,A) Planck constant over two pi from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,H) Latin small letter lambda with stroke from Extra Math style (Ctrl+K,L) Script small l from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,L) Blackboard-bold capital R from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+R) Blackboard-bold capital Z from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+Z) Blackboard-bold capital C from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+C) Blackboard-bold capital Q from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+Q) Blackboard-bold capital N from Extra Math style (Ctrl+D,Shift+N) Infinity from Symbol style (Ctrl+K,I) Greek capital letter Omega from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,O) Inverted ohm sign from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Shift+O) Dagger from Function style Greek capital letter Delta from Symbol style

Degree sign from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,D) Angle from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Shift+A) Measured angle from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Alt+A) Spherical angle from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,Alt+Shift+A) Perpendicular from Symbol style (Ctrl+Shift+K,P) Parallel to from Extra Math style (Ctrl+Shift+K,|)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Greek Characters (Lowercase)

Greek small letter alpha from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,A) Greek small letter beta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,B) Greek small letter chi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,C) Greek small letter delta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,D) Greek small letter epsilon from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,E) Greek small letter phi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,F) Greek phi symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,J) Greek small letter gamma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,G) Greek small letter eta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,H) Greek small letter iota from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,I) Greek small letter kappa from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,K) Greek small letter lamda from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,L) Greek small letter mu from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,M) Greek small letter nu from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,N) Greek small letter omicron from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,O) Greek small letter pi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,P) Greek pi symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,V) Greek small letter theta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Q) Greek theta symbol from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+J) Greek small letter rho from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,R) Greek small letter sigma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,S) Greek small letter final sigma from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+V) Greek small letter tau from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,T) Greek small letter upsilon from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,U) Greek small letter omega from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,W) Greek small letter xi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,X) Greek small letter psi from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Y) Greek small letter zeta from L.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Z)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Greek Characters (Uppercase)

Greek capital letter Alpha from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+A) Greek capital letter Beta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+B) Greek capital letter Chi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+C) Greek capital letter Delta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+D) Greek capital letter Epsilon from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+E) Greek capital letter Phi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+F) Greek capital letter Gamma from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+G) Greek capital letter Eta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+H) Greek capital letter Iota from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+I) Greek capital letter Kappa from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+K) Greek capital letter Lamda from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+L) Greek capital letter Mu from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+M) Greek capital letter Nu from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+N) Greek capital letter Omicron from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+O) Greek capital letter Pi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+P) Greek capital letter Theta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Q) Greek capital letter Rho from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+R) Greek capital letter Sigma from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+S) Greek capital letter Tau from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+T) Greek upsilon with hook symbol from U.C. Greek style Greek capital letter Omega from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+W) Greek capital letter Xi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+X) Greek capital letter Psi from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Y) Greek capital letter Zeta from U.C. Greek style (Ctrl+G,Shift+Z)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Template Palettes
In This Chapter Template Palettes Fence templates Fraction and Radical Templates Subscript and Superscript Templates Summation Templates Integral templates Underbar and overbar templates Labeled arrow templates Products and Set Theory Templates Matrix Templates Box templates

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Template Palettes
Fence templates Fraction and radical templates Subscript and superscript templates Summation templates Integral templates Underbar and overbar templates Labeled arrow templates Products and set theory templates Matrix templates Box templates

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Fence templates
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Parentheses, or round brackets (Ctrl+9) Brackets, or square brackets (Ctrl+[) Braces, or curly brackets (Ctrl+{) Angle brackets (inner products, etc.) (Ctrl+,) Single vertical bars (absolute value, determinant, etc.) (Ctrl+T,|)

Open brackets

Left bracket (Ctrl+T,[) Right bracket (Ctrl+T,]) Left brace (Ctrl+T,{) Right brace (Ctrl+T,}) Left angle bracket (Ctrl+T,<) Right angle bracket (Ctrl+T,>)

http://www.dessci.com

Co p yright

1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Fraction and Radical Templates

Full-size fraction (Ctrl+F) Reduced-size fraction (Ctrl+T,Shift+F) Full-size diagonal fraction (Ctrl+/) Reduced-size diagonal fraction (Ctrl+T,?) Slash fraction (Ctrl+T,Alt+/) Square root (Ctrl+R) nth root (Ctrl+T,N) Long division (Ctrl+T,D) Long division with quotient (Ctrl+T,Shift+D)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Subscript and Superscript Templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Superscript (Ctrl+H) Subscript (Ctrl+L) Superscript and subscript (Ctrl+J)

Over-script (Ctrl+T,Shift+L) Under-script (limit) (Ctrl+T,Alt+L) Over-script and under-script (Ctrl+T,L)

Large operator with over-script limit (Ctrl+T,Shift+O) Large operator with under-script limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+O) Large operator with over-script and under-script limits (Ctrl+T,O)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Summation Templates
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Summation with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+S) Summation with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+S) Summation with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,S)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Integral templates

Indefinite integral (no limits) (Ctrl+Shift+I,!) Definite integral with overscript and underscript limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,S) Definite integral with superscript and subscript limits (Ctrl+I) Indefinite integral (no limits) (Ctrl+Shift+I,!) Integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+S) Integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+1) Double integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,@) Double integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,2) Double integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+2) Triple integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,#) Triple integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,3) Triple integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+3) Contour integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+C) Contour integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,C) Contour integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+C) Area integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+A) Area integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,A) Area integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+A) Volume integral with no limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+V) Volume integral with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,V) Volume integral with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+V) Integral with counter-clockwise loop without limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+Left) Integral with counter-clockwise loop with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Left) Integral with counter-clockwise loop with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+Left) Integral with clockwise loop without limits (Ctrl+Shift+I,Shift+Right) Integral with clockwise loop with underscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Right) Integral with clockwise loop with subscript limit (Ctrl+Shift+I,Alt+Right)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Underbar and overbar templates

Tilde (Ctrl+^,~) Hat (Ctrl+^,6) Arc (Ctrl+^,9) Joint status (Ctrl+^,J) Over-bar (Ctrl+^,-) Double over-bar (Ctrl+^,D) Under-bar (Ctrl+^,_) Double under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+D) Right arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Right) Left arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Left) Right harpoon over-bar (Ctrl+^,Alt+Right) Double-headed arrow over-bar (Ctrl+^,Up) Right arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Right) Left arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Left) Right harpoon under-bar (Ctrl+^,Alt+S hift+Right) Double-headed arrow under-bar (Ctrl+^,Shift+Up) Mid-line strike-through (Ctrl+^,Alt+-) Strike-through (Ctrl+^,X) Strike-through (bottom-left to upper-right) (Ctrl+^,/) Strike-through (top-left to bottom-right) (Ctrl+^,\)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Labeled arrow templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Right arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Right) Right arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,CtrlAlt+Right) Right arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Right) Left arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Left) Left arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,CtrlAlt+Left) Left arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Left) Double-headed arrow with upper text slot (Ctrl+T,Shift+Up) Double-headed arrow with lower text slot (Ctrl+T,CtrlAlt+Up) Double-headed arrow arrow with upper and lower text slots (Ctrl+T,Up)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Products and Set Theory Templates


Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Product with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+P) Product with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+P) Product with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,P)

Coproduct with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+C) Coproduct with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+C) Coproduct with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,C)

Intersection with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+I) Intersection with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+I) Intersection with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,I)

Union with no limits (Ctrl+T,Shift+U) Union with underscript limit (Ctrl+T,Alt+U) Union with underscript and overscript limits (Ctrl+T,U)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Matrix Templates
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

2 row, 2 column matrix (Ctrl+M,2)

3 row, 3 column matrix (Ctrl+M,3)

4 row, 4 column matrix (Ctrl+M,4)

Variable-size matrix or table (Ctrl+M,N)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Box templates
Commands, templates and symbols without default shortcuts are shown in italics. To assign or remove shortcuts see Assigning and Removing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Box (Ctrl+Shift+T,X)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Getting More Help


In This Chapter Ways to Get Assistance While You Work Getting help at the Design Science Website Technical Support Giving us Feedback

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Ways to Get Assistance While You Work


There are several ways to get help while using MathType: If you need help understanding how a specific dialog works, just click the Help button in that dialog to bring up MathType's online help. If you need help understanding how a menu command works, click on the Index button in this window and find the menu name. Go to the page that describes the menu and find the section on that command. Alternatively, you can click on the Search tab to search for the command. Visit the technical support page at the Design Science website. See Getting Help at the Design Science Website. Contact our technical support department. See Technical Support.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Getting help at the Design Science Website


We have many technical support notices on our website that can give you detailed solutions to common MathType problems. This is often the quickest way to solve your problem, since it is available 24 hours per day. Just visit the Support page on the Design Science website. See also Technical support

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Technical Support
If you can't solve your problem by reading this help file, or by visiting our website's technical support area, please send email to our technical support department at support@dessci.com . Usually, email is the best way to get technical support. You avoid time zone differences or being put on hold when our support engineers are busy helping someone else. If you don't have email access or just want to talk to a real person, call us at: +1 (562) 432-2920 Monday - Friday, 8am to 5pm, Pacific time (GMT-8). Please have your product key ready when you call. Also, if possible, please call when you are sitting in front of your computer with MathType and, if appropriate, your word processor running. As of this writing, we provide free technical support for MathType to all registered users. In order for us to provide this service and to keep it free, please try to exhaust the other options for getting help before calling us. Also, please do not call us on our 800 sales line, as this is reserved for new sales only and we will not transfer your call. See also Getting Help at the Design Science Website

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Giving us Feedback
We are very interested in what you think of MathType. Please send any praise, criticism, enhancement requests, etc. to support@dessci.com . Please be precise in your description. If the request is for some new character or template, please send a good-quality photocopy of the most professionally typeset version you can find of what you have in mind to: Enhancement Request Design Science, Inc. 140 Pine Ave, 4th floor Long Beach, CA 90802 Please don't send it by fax, as the resolution is not high enough.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

License Agreements
In This Chapter MathType's End-user license agreement Questions and Answers About your License Agreement Font License Agreement Multi-user and Site Licensing

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathType's End-user license agreement


License Agreement The accompanying Software and User Documentation are proprietary products owned by Design Science, Inc., and protected under U.S. and international copyright law. Except as authorized under this License Grant, the Software may be used only on computers owned, leased, or otherwise controlled by you and only on one computer at a time. Concurrent use on two or more computers is not permitted without separate authorization and the payment of additional license fees. You may not reverse assemble, reverse compile, or otherwise translate the Software. You may make copies of the software for backup purposes. Except as authorized under this License Grant, no copies of the Software or the User Documentation may be made by you or any person under your authority or control. Limited Warranty Design Science makes no warranties, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Any remedy under this warranty is limited to return of the Software and the User Documentation to the dealer or to Design Science for replacement or refund.This warranty is valid for 90 days from your date of purchase. Design Science excludes any warranty coverage for incidental or consequential damages. Some states do not allow limitations on implied warranties, so some of the above limitations may not apply to you.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Questions and Answers About your License Agreement


Can I use MathType at home and at work? Yes, as long as it is only used in one place at a time. Can I use MathType on my portable computer as well as my home and office computers? Yes, as long as it is only used in one place at a time. Can I install MathType on my network server for everyone in my department to use? Not unless you can ensure that it is only used on one computer at a time. See Multi-user and site licensing. Can I install MathType on one computer at work that we all share? Sure, that's OK because it is only being used on one computer at a time. What do I do if I want to give my documents to a friend to view and print, but they don't have MathType? In order to view and print documents that contain MathType equations, your friend only needs the MathType fonts, not the MathType program itself. Send your friend a copy of the MathType Font Installer (either the TrueType version for most people, or the PostScript version for typesetting services). If your friend wants to edit the equations in your document they'll need to buy their own copy of MathType. If my school or department wants to use MathType, do they all have to buy copies? No, we have multi-user and site license plans to accommodate such situations. See Multi-user and Site Licensing. See Also MathType's end-user License Agreement

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Font License Agreement


License Grant
This Font Installer and the Fonts it installs ("Software") are products of Design Science, Inc., and protected under U.S. and international copyright law. By continuing this installation process, you are agreeing to abide by the restrictions described in this agreement. The Software may be used solely to read, view, and print documents composed using Design Science's MathType product. You may not reverse assemble, reverse compile, or otherwise translate the Software. You may not modify the Software or create derived works from the Software. You are permitted to make copies of the Fonts to install into printers. You may distribute unlimited copies of the Software to third parties, including copies for commercial distribution, as long as each copy is unmodified from the original. Such third parties are required to abide by this license agreement. You are not permitted to distribute the Software with any implementation of the TeX typesetting system as defined by The TeX Book, by Donald Knuth. This restriction does not apply to software products that convert the TeX language to or from other languages or word processing document file formats.

Limited Warranty
Design Science makes no warranties, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. There are no remedies under this warranty. Design Science is not responsible for any damages incurring from the use of the Software. Some states do not allow limitations on implied warranties, so some of the above limitations may not apply to you.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Multi-user and Site Licensing


MathType licenses are available at substantial savings over an equivalent number of individual copies for K-12 schools, universities/departments, industry and other types of organizations. Contact Design Science for pricing and details: Email: sales@dessci.com +1 (800) 827-0685 (US and Canada; sales only) +1 (562) 432-2920 (Outside US and Canada) +1 (562) 432-2857 (Fax)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Glossary
In This Chapter Blackboard bold (double-stroked) Chapter/Section Breaks Character Descriptions Character Style Clipboard Current Equation Default Web Browser Display Equation EGO (Edit Graphic Object) EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) Equation Preferences Expanding Integrals Factory Settings Fences Focus Font Font Encoding Fraktur (Old German) Function GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) Inline Equation Insertion Point Keyboard Shortcuts TeX Language Input LaTeX Left-Numbered Display Equation Math Axis MathML New Equation Preferences Nudging OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) OMML (Office Math Markup Language) Pile Points Relational Operator Right-Numbered Display Equation Slot Styles Symbol Template TeX

Texvc TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) Typesizes Unicode Units WMF (Windows Metafiles) The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Blackboard bold (double-stroked)


This is a style of font often used in mathematics to represent sets. For example: N for the set of natural numbers, and R for the reals. MathType's Euclid Math Two font contains the commonly used blackboard bold characters. Suggestion: Assign the Euclid Math Two font to the User 1 (or User 2) style using the Define Styles dialog. From then on, whenever you want to enter a blackboard bold character, type Ctrl+Shift+U (or Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U for User 2) followed by that character.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Chapter/Section Breaks
Chapter/section breaks set the chapter and section number part of all equation numbers in the document up to the following chapter/section break. There are two ways to set each number: increment and explicit. An increment break causes the chapter or section number to be one greater than that of the previous part of the document; an explicit break gives the chapter or section number a specific value.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Character Descriptions
MathType stores textual character descriptions for most characters that are useful in mathematics. These descriptions are displayed in several places in MathType: In the Status Bar as you pass the mouse pointer over symbols in the toolbar In the Insert Symbol Dialog for the currently selected character in the symbol grid In the Customize Keyboard Dialog for symbols that have keystroke shortcuts assigned to them

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Character Style
MathType uses the term character style to refer to stylistic variations of a font, such as bold or italic. MathType supports only plain, italic, bold, and bold-italic styles. Underlines and overlines can be applied using the underbar template. Be careful not to confuse this term with style.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Clipboard
A temporary holding place for information (pictures, text, etc.) to transfer between one place and another using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands on the Edit menus of most applications. Copy places a copy of the selection on the clipboard. Cut works the same as Copy but also deletes the selection. Paste inserts a copy of the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point or replaces the current selection.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Current Equation
The current equation is the one you are editing in the top-most MathType window or, when working in one of MathType's dialogs, the equation in the window whose menu was used to display the dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Default Web Browser


The default web browser is a user setting that determines which (if any) of the Web browsers installed on your computer will be used when you try to access a World Wide Web address (http://...) on the Internet from any program other than a browser. Refer to your browser's online help to find out how to make it the default Web browser.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Display Equation
A display equation (also referred to as a paragraph equation) is an equation on a line by itself, usually centered within the line. See also Inline Equation.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

EGO (Edit Graphic Object)


EGO is a Macintosh software technology that allows you to add objects (in the case of MathType Editor, equations) directly into a word processing document, or any other kind of document. To add an equation to a document, choose the word processor's or other application's Insert Equation command, which is usually located in the Insert or Edit menu.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)


EPS is a file format used for graphics in desktop publishing applications like Adobe PageMaker and Quark XPress.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Equation Preferences
Equation preferences are the set of styles, sizes and spacing rules applied to an equation.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Expanding Integrals
Normally, in professionally typeset mathematics, integral signs in equations are all the same size. Occasionally, however, you may want an integral to expand to the height of its contents. To enter an expanding integral template instead of the normal one, hold down the Shift key as you insert the integral from the template palettes.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Factory Settings
These are the settings for equation preferences, keyboard shortcuts, functions recognized, etc. for MathType as initially set by the software when it is installed for the first time, before you made any changes to them. See also the Preferences Menu, Equation Preferences and New Equation Preferences.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Fences
Fence characters are symbols such as brackets [ ], parentheses ( ), braces { }, etc. that are used to enclose or "fence" other characters or symbols. A fence template is a template that uses one or more of these fence characters.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Focus
Focus refers to the part of the window to which keystrokes will be sent. It is usually highlighted in some way.

Examples:
When a MathType equation has the focus, the insertion point blinks to indicate where characters that you type will be entered into the equation. When a symbol or template in the palette menus has the focus, it is displayed with a raised outline around it to indicate that if you click on it or press Enter the symbol or template will be inserted into the equation.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Font
A font is a set of characters having a common stylistic look. MathType allows access to all fonts installed on your computer (except old-style bitmap and vector fonts). Use the Windows Control Panel's Fonts section to install and remove fonts. Use the Insert Symbol Dialog to review the available fonts on your computer and to explore the characters contained in each font.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Font Encoding
A font encoding is a correspondence between font position (0 to 255 for most fonts) and the character in that position (also known as its glyph). A font encoding is also called a character set. Many fonts can share the same encoding. For example, most Windows alphabetic fonts have the Windows ANSI encoding, and most Macintosh fonts have the Mac Roman encoding. MathType has names for common font encodings. These can be seen in the encoding item in the Insert Symbol dialog. They are a key component of MathType's font knowledge system.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Fraktur (Old German)


This is a style of font often used in mathematics. MathType's Euclid Fraktur font contains the full Fraktur alphabet (e.g., A, I, a, b). Suggestion: Assign the Euclid Fraktur font to the User 1 (or User 2) style using the Define Styles dialog. From then on, whenever you want to enter a Fraktur character, type Ctrl+U (or Ctrl+Alt+U for User 2) followed by that character.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Function
Functions are mathematical operators represented by multi- character names such as sin or cos, as opposed to single-character operators like + or . MathType automatically recognizes standard function names as you type and gives them the Function style . You can add or remove function names from the automatic recognition process using the Functions Recognized dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)


GIF is a graphics file format generally used for line art (as opposed to JPEG which is best for photographs) in Internet publishing applications. Save equations in this format when creating webpages. See also Save As Dialog and Web and GIF Preferences Dialog.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Inline Equation
An inline equation is an equation inserted in a line of text. Many word processors position inline equations so that the baseline of the surrounding text is aligned with the equation's baseline. See also display equation.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Insertion Point
The insertion point is a blinking line (or lines) indicating the place in the equation at which characters you type, or symbols and templates you insert, will go. Here's an example of what the insertion point looks like when it is at the end of the slot containing a summation: Normal view:

Nested view:

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Keyboard Shortcuts
A keyboard shortcut is a combination of one or more keystrokes, usually involving the Ctrl, Shift, Option, and/or Alt keys, that invokes a menu command or inserts a symbol or template.MathType has many built-in keyboard shortcuts but you can create your own using the Customize Keyboard command on the Preferences menu. The keystrokes that define a keyboard shortcut are displayed in menus, the status bar, and dialogs using standardWindows abbreviations. For example, Ctrl+Shift+F1 means to hold down the Ctrl and Shift keys, then to press F1. MathType allows you to define two- stroke shortcuts that consist of one stroke followed by another. For example, Ctrl+Shift+F1,A means to press the Ctrl, Shift, and F1 keys down as stated previously, then immediately followed by pressing the A key.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

TeX Language Input


Language Input is a feature in MathType that allows you to enter a subset of TeX. MathType will convert the TeX input to a MathType equation. See Also Using TeX Language Input

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

LaTeX
LaTex is a dialect of the TeX typesetting language.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Left-Numbered Display Equation


A display equation that is preceded by a left-aligned equation number on the same line.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Math Axis
The math axis is an imaginary horizontal line to which certain math elements align, such as the bars in plus signs, the point of curly braces, fraction bars, etc. For example:

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

MathML
MathML markup language is a implementation of XML created to describe math equations for integration into webpages.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

New Equation Preferences


These are equation preferences that are used for any equation you create from scratch by choosing New from the File menu or using Insert Object in an OLE- compatible application. See also factory settings.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Nudging
Nudging is a way that you can make fine adjustments to the position of any equation elements. Just select the part of the equation you want to adjust, hold down the Ctrl key, and use the arrow keys to move in the desired direction. You can remove all nudging from selected items using the Reset Nudge command on the Format menu.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)


OLE is a Microsoft software technology that allows you to add objects (in the case of MathType, equations) directly into a word processing document, or any other kind of document. To add an equation to a document, choose the word processor's or other application's Insert Object command, and choose "MathType 6.0 Equation" from the list of object types.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

OMML (Office Math Markup Language)


Office Math Markup Language (OMML) is an XML markup language for representing mathematics in Microsoft Word 2007 and some other Office applications.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Pile
A pile is a vertical stack of lines (or slots ). You can create a pile by simply typing Enter in a line (slot). You can use the Align commands in the Format menu to change the horizontal alignment of the lines in a pile.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Points
Points are a standard unit of distance in printing, graphic design, and typesetting. There are 72.28 points in an inch. A point is .3515 mm.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Relational Operator
This is any character that MathType considers to be in the class of mathematical symbols that describe a relationship between the expression to the left of the symbol and the one to the right. Examples of relational operators are = (equals), < (less-than), and > (greater-than). MathType surrounds relational operators with a larger amount of space than other kinds of operator.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Right-Numbered Display Equation


A display equation that is followed by a right-aligned equation number on the same line.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Slot
A slot is a place in the equation that hold symbols and templates. Each slot behaves much like a line of text in a word processor. Empty slots are displayed as a dotted rectangle.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Styles
Each character in a MathType equation is either directly assigned a specific font and character style , or is assigned one of eleven styles. MathType's styles are somewhat analogous to text styles in word processing and page layout applications. Each one is defined as a combination of a font and character style (e.g., Times/bold/italic or Symbol/bold). Styles save you from having to worry about fonts and character styles separately, and hence speed up your work and help you maintain consistency in your equations. Also, by changing the definition of a style, you can quickly change the appearance of all the characters that use it. The styles available in MathType are Text, Function, Variable, Lower-case Greek, Upper-case Greek, Symbol, Vector-Matrix, Number,and Extra Math. MathType also has User 1 and User 2 styles. MathType will assign certain styles to certain kinds of characters automatically, based on its knowledge of mathematics and typesetting conventions. This intelligent assignment of styles is a unique feature of MathType which significantly increases your productivity and reduces typographical errors.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Symbol
A symbol is another name for a single character. Symbols are inserted into equations using the symbol palettes, Insert Symbol dialog or simply typed from the keyboard.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Template
A template is a formatted arrangement of nested slots and symbols . Templates are inserted into equations using the template palettes.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

TeX
TeX is a typesetting language invented in the late 1970's by Donald Knuth, a Stanford computer science professor. It uses markup such as $x^2 + \alpha$ to represent equations.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Texvc
Texvc is a typesetting language based on TeX that is used by Wikipedia and others. Since it's a basic subset of TeX, trying one of the Texvc translators is a good idea when targeting an application or website accepting TeX formulas.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)


TIFF is a graphics file format originally created to be used with PostScript printing, but is also popular for use with high color depth images.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Typesizes
In MathType, a typesize is simply a character size that you can refer to by name, rather than by numerical value. Each character you enter in an equation is automatically assigned one of five typesizes (Full , Subscript/Superscript, SubSubscript/Superscript, Symbol , and Sub- Symbol) depending on its position in the equation. You will usually not have to worry about which typesize is currently in effect; MathType "knows" when you are entering a subscript, for example, and assigns the Subscript typesize automatically. By changing the definition of a typesize, you can quickly change the size of all the characters that use it.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Unicode
Unicode is a character encoding standard that assigns a numerical value (from 0 to 65535 and above) to every known character used by the human written languages in use in the modern world. Although Unicode does contain many math characters, Design Science has assigned additional code points in Unicode's Private Use Area as allowed by the Unicode standard for additional characters used in mathematics. We use the term MTCode to mean Unicode plus our MathType extensions. For more information on Unicode, see their website (http://www.unicode.org) or get the book version of the standard (The Unicode Standard, Version 2.0, 1996, Addison-Wesley Developers Press, ISBN 0-201-48345-9).

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Units
You can enter dimensions such as spaces and sizes using any one of several units by choosing from the drop-down list directly to the right of where you enter the value of the dimension. MathType accepts the following units: Points (pt) This is the most common unit and is MathType's default. There are approximately 72 points in an inch. Centimeters (cm) Inches (in) Picas (pi) There are approximately 6 picas in an inch. Percentage of Full size (%) Use this unit to make a dimension vary in proportion to the Full typesize as defined in the Define Sizes dialog. This allows you to change the overall size of your equations while maintaining the same spacing. See Also Define Sizes Dialog Define Spacing Dialog

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

WMF (Windows Metafiles)


This is the standard graphics file format for the Microsoft Windows family of operating systems. Although the metafile format can accommodate bitmap images, the metafiles created by MathType are "draw"-style graphics and, therefore, are scalable and will print at full resolution. Use this format to import equations into drawing applications.

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C)


The W3C is the governing organization for the World Wide Web part of the Internet. They and their member organizations decide on standards for displaying and communicating information on the Web. Some of the important standards they administer are HTML and, for MathType users, MathML. The W3C's website is at http://www.w3.org .

http://www.dessci.com
Co p yright 1996-2008 De sig n Scie nce , Inc. All rig hts re se rve d.

Você também pode gostar